MELDAS is a registered trademark of Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.

Other product names and company names are trademarks or registered trademarks of their respective
companies.
 Introduction

This manual is a guide for users of NC Designer for the Mitsubishi CNC700/70 series.
This manual describes the function groups used in NC Designer. In addition, fully understand
"Precautions for Safety" on the next page to use the Mitsubishi CNC700/70 series safely.

Details described in this manual:

CAUTION
For items described as "Restrictions" or "Usable State" in this manual, the instruction
manual issued by the machine tool builder takes precedence over this manual.
Items that are not described in this manual must be interpreted as "not possible".
This manual is written on the assumption that all option functions are added. Confirm the
specifications issued by the machine tool builder before use.
Some screens and functions may differ depending on each NC system (or version), and some
functions may not be possible. Please confirm the specifications before use.
 Precautions for Safety

Always read the specifications issued by the machine tool builder, this manual, related manuals and attached
documents before installation, operation, programming, maintenance or inspection to ensure correct use.
Understand this numerical controller, safety items and cautions before using the unit.
This manual ranks the safety precautions into "DANGER", "WARNING" and "CAUTION".

When the user may be subject to imminent fatalities or major injuries if handling is
DANGER mistaken.

When the user may be subject to fatalities or major injuries if handling is mistaken.
WARNING

When the user may be subject to injuries or when physical damage may occur if
CAUTION handling is mistaken.

Note that even items ranked as " CAUTION", may lead to major results depending on the situation. In any
case, important information that must always be observed is described.

DANGER
Not applicable in this manual.

WARNING
Not applicable in this manual.

CAUTION
1. Items related to product and manual
If the descriptions relating to the "restrictions" and "allowable conditions" conflict between this
manual and the machine tool builder's instruction manual‚ the latter has priority over the former.
The operations to which no reference is made in this manual should be considered
impossible.
This manual is complied on the assumption that your machine is provided with all optional
functions. Confirm the functions available for your machine before proceeding to operation by
referring to the specification issued by the machine tool builder.
In some NC system versions‚ there may be cases that different pictures appear on the screen‚
the machine operates in a different way on some function is not activated.
 Contents

1. Outline................................................................................................................................................................ 1
1.1 GUI Library ................................................................................................................................................ 1
2. GDraw ................................................................................................................................................................ 3
2.1 List of GDraw Functions............................................................................................................................ 3
2.2 Outlines of GDraw Functions .................................................................................................................... 8
3. GResource....................................................................................................................................................... 94
3.1 List of GResource Functions................................................................................................................... 94
3.2 Outlines of GResource Functions ........................................................................................................... 95
4. GEvent............................................................................................................................................................ 105
4.1 List of GEvent Functions ....................................................................................................................... 105
4.2 Outline of GEvent Functions ................................................................................................................. 106
5. GCS ................................................................................................................................................................ 114
5.1 List of GCS Functions ........................................................................................................................... 114
5.2 Description of GCS Functions............................................................................................................... 131
6. GIO.................................................................................................................................................................. 413
6.1 List of GIP Functions............................................................................................................................. 413
6.2 Outline of GIO Functions....................................................................................................................... 414
7. GMMemory..................................................................................................................................................... 418
7.1 List of GMMemory Functions ................................................................................................................ 418
7.2 Outline of GMMemory Functions .......................................................................................................... 419
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions.................................................................................................................. 426
Index................................................................................................................................................................. X - 1
 1. Outline
1.1 GUI Library

1. Outline

This section gives an outline of the GUI library.

1.1 GUI Library

The GUI library is a C/C++ language GUI library that gives powerful support for GUI development.
The GUI library is equipped with the functions necessary for the construction of not only event
management but also GUI elements such as window systems, an it supports simple construction of
GUIs. In addition, it is equipped with a Graphic Platform Interface (GPI), which is an arrangement for
calling up processing dependent on hardware to make porting to various platforms easy. Porting the
GUI library to other platforms is done by creating one with this GPI processing matched to the
platform.

User Application
MethodCall CallBack

Event
Event
GEvent GControl GShape
（Event/Timer）
GWin
（Screen/Frame/
Panel/Window）

GResource GDraw

GPI(Grafic Platform Interface)

OS/Driver/Hardware/Font

GUI Library Configuration

1
 1. Outline
1.1 GUI Library

The functions for the various function groups are as follows.

Function Name Outline

GEvent Function group for managing various types of events such as the mouse,
keyboard and timer and window system events such as
GWin/GControl/GShape
GResource Function group for handling resources such as character strings, 3D
borders and images
GWin Function group for window system management
GControl Function group for controlling buttons, pictures and the like that operate
on GWin
GShape Function group for managing rectangles, circles, straight lines and other
figures that operate on GWin
GDraw Function group for making settings for the drawing environment such as
basic figures, character drawing, coordinates, colors, etc.
GPI Function group for handling parts that are dependent on hardware or OS

2
 2. GDraw
2.1 List of GDraw Functions

2. GDraw

This section describes the GDraw functions.

2.1 List of GDraw Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

1 GDBeginDraw void GDBeginDraw.c Begin drawing
2 GDBitBlt void GDBitBlt.c Block transfer
3 GDCalcBorderRect void GDCalcBorderRect.c Calculate rectangular area
based on 3D border settings
4 GDCloseDrawHandle void GDCloseDrawHandle.c Release drawing handle
5 GDDefineFillPattern void GDDefineFillPattern.c Define fill pattern
6 GDDefinePenDash void GDDefinePenDash.c Define line pattern
7 GDDrawArc void GDDrawArc.c Draw arc
8 GDDrawBezier void GDDrawBezier.c Draw Bezier curve
9 GDDrawCaptionCursorStri void GDDrawCaptionCursorString Draw caption character string
ng .c (with cursor display)
10 GDDrawCaptionString void GDDrawCaptionString.c Draw caption character string
11 GDDrawCaptionStringRes void GDDrawCaptionStringResou Draw caption based on
ource rce.c character string resources
12 GDDrawGrf short GDDrawGrf.c Draw BMP
13 GDDrawImage void GDDrawImage.c Draw image
14 GDDrawImageResource void GDDrawImageResource.c Draw resource image
15 GDDrawOval void GDDrawOval.c Draw oval
16 GDDrawOvalBorder void GDDrawOvalBorder.c Draw (oval) circular 3D border
17 GDDrawOvalBorderResou void GDDrawOvalBorderResourc Draw (oval) circular resource
rce e.c 3D border
18 GDDrawPie void GDDrawPie.c Draw sector
19 GDDrawPoly void GDDrawPoly.c Draw polygon
20 GDDrawRect void GDDrawRect.c Draw rectangle
21 GDDrawRectBorder void GDDrawRectBorder.c Draw rectangular 3D border
22 GDDrawRectBorderResou void GDDrawRectBorderResourc Draw rectangular resource 3D
rce e.c border
23 GDDrawRRect void GDDrawRRect.c Draw rounded corner rectangle
24 GDDrawString void GDDrawString.c Draw character string
25 GDDrawStringResource void GDDrawStringResource.c Draw resource character string
26 GDEndDraw void GDEndDraw.c End drawing
27 GDFlushScreen void GDFlushScreen.c Refresh screen
28 GDGetCharHeight short GDGetCharHeight.c Get specified character height
29 GDGetCharWidth short GDGetCharWidth.c Get specified character width

3
2. GDraw
2.1 List of GDraw Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

30 GDGetNextChar char* GDGetNextChar.c Get next character
31 GDGetPalette void GDGetPalette.c Get palette color code
32 GDGetPixel GColor GDGetPixel.c Get color code for specified
coordinates
33 GDGetPrevChar char* GDGetPrevChar.c Get previous character
34 GDGetStringLength unsigne GDGetStringLength.c Get character string length
d long
35 GDGetStringWidth short GDGetStringWidth.c Get specified character width
36 GDInceptClipRect short GDInceptClipRect.c Clip the area of overlap
between the specified
rectangle and the current clip
area
37 GDInitPlatform short GDInitPlatform.c Initialization processing for GUI
library environment
38 GDLineTo void GDLineTo.c Draw line
39 GDMoveTo void GDMoveTo.c Move pen position
40 GDOffsetLocalOrigin void GDOffsetLocalOrigin.c Offset to local coordinate origin
41 GDOpenDrawHandle HGDRA GDOpenDrawHandle.c Get drawing handle
W
42 GDQueryError unsigne GDQueryError.c Get final error code
d short
43 GDQuitPlatform short GDQuitPlatform.c Quit processing for GUI library
environment
44 GDSetBackColor void GDSetBackColor.c Set background color
45 GDSetBrush void GDSetBrush.c Set brush
46 GDSetClipRect void GDSetClipRect.c Define clipping area
47 GDSetDisplay short GDSetDisplay.c Set graphics mode
48 GDSetDrawingMode void GDSetDrawingMode.c Set raster operations for
drawing
49 GDSetFillAttribute void GDSetFillAttribute.c Set fill attributes
50 GDSetFillColor void GDSetFillColor.c Set colors for foreground and
background
51 GDSetFillPattern void GDSetFillPattern.c Set fill pattern
52 GDSetFont short GDSetFont.c Set font
53 GDSetForeColor void GDSetForeColor.c Set foreground color
54 GDSetLocalMode void GDSetLocalMode.c Set to local (physical)
coordinate system
55 GDSetPenColor void GDSetPenColor.c Set line and character color
56 GDSetPenDash void GDSetPenDash.c Set line pattern
57 GDSetPenJoin void GDSetPenJoin.c Specify joint for rectangles and
polygons
58 GDSetPenSize void GDSetPenSize.c Set line width (pen size)

4
2. GDraw
2.1 List of GDraw Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

59 GDSetPixel void GDSetPixel.c Draw pixels
60 GDSetSimpleFont HGFON GDSetSimpleFont.c Set simple font
T
61 GDSetSimpleFontResourc HGFON GDSetSimpleFontResource. Set resource simple font
e T c
62 GDSetVirtualMode void GDSetVirtualMode.c Set to virtual coordinate system
63 GDSetVirtualRect void GDSetVirtualRect.c Set rectangular area in virtual
coordinates
64 GDSetVram short GDSetVram.c Set VRAM for drawing
destination
65 GFGetFontAttribute short GFGetFontAttribute.c Get font attributes
66 GFGetFontCount short GFGetFontCount.c Get number of fonts that can be
used
67 GFGetFontInformation short GFGetFontInformation.c Get information for font of
specified No.
68 GFGetFontUserAttribute short GFGetFontUserAttribute.c Get user font attributes
69 GFGetSize short GFGetSize.c Get font size
70 GFLoadFont HGFON GFLoadFont.c Load specified font
T
71 GFReleaseFont void GFReleaseFont.c Release font
72 GFSetFontAttribute short GFSetFontAttribute.c Set font attributes
73 GFSetFontUserAttribute short GFSetFontUserAttribute.c Set user font attributes
74 GFSetSize short GFSetSize.c Set character size
75 GRDuplicateRect void GRDuplicateRect.c Copy rectangle
76 GREqualRect short GREqualRect.c Confirm that rectangle areas
are the same
77 GRGetRect void GRGetRect.c Get rectangle area
78 GRInceptRect short GRInceptRect.c Confirm rectangular area
overlap
79 GRMapRect void GRMapRect.c Enlarge/reduce rectangular
area
80 GRMapToScreenRect void GRMapToScreenRect.c Convert rectangular area
defined with pgrRect to screen
coordinate system
81 GRMapToVirtualRect void GRMapToVirtualRect.c Convert rectangular area
defined with pgrRect to virtual
screen coordinate system
82 GROffsetRect void GROffsetRect.c Rectangle offset processing
83 GRPhysicalToVirtualRect void GRPhysicalToVirtualRect.c Convert rectangle physical
coordinates to virtual
coordinates

5
2. GDraw
2.1 List of GDraw Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

84 GRPointInRect short GRPointInRect.c Check if point coordinates fall
within rectangle coordinates
86 GRSetRect void GRSetRect.c Define rectangular area
87 GRShiftRect short GRShiftRect.c Rectangle shift processing
88 GRUnionRect void GRUnionRect.c Join rectangle areas
89 GRVirtualToPhysicalRect void GRVirtualToPhysicalRect.c Convert rectangular area virtual
coordinates to physical
coordinates
90 GLDuplicateLine void GLDuplicateLine.c Copy line structure
91 GLGetLine void GLGetLine.c Get line
92 GLMapLine void GLMapLine.c Enlarge/reduce line
coordinates
93 GLOffsetLine void GLOffsetLine.c Offset processing for line
structure
94 GLPhysicalToVirtualLine void GLPhysicalToVirtualLine.c Convert line structure physical
coordinates to virtual
coordinates
95 GLSetLine void GLSetLine.c Define line structure
96 GLVirtualToPhysicalLine void GLVirtualToPhysicalLine.c Convert line structure virtual
coordinates to physical
coordinates
97 GPTDuplicatePoint void GPTDuplicatePoint.c Copy point structure
98 GPTGetPoint void GPTGetPoint.c Get point structure content
99 GPTMapPoint void GPTMapPoint.c Map rectangle defined with
pgrFrom to rectangle defined
with pgrTo
100 GPTMapToScreenPoint void GPTMapToScreenPoint.c Convert point structure to
screen coordinates
101 GPTMapToVirtualPoint void GPTMapToVirtualPoint.c Convert point defined in
pgptPoint to virtual screen
coordinate system
102 GPTOffsetPoint void GPTOffsetPoint.c Point structure offset
processing
103 GPTPhysicalToVirtualPoin void GPTPhysicalToVirtualPoint.c Convert point structure physical
t coordinates to virtual
coordinates
104 GPTSetPoint void GPTSetPoint.c Define point structure
105 GPTVirtualToPhysicalPoin void GPTVirtualToPhysicalPoint.c Convert point structure virtual
t coordinates to physical
coordinates
106 GPGetPoly void GPGetPoly.c Get polygon settings
107 GPMapPoly void GPMapPoly.c Enlarge/reduce polygon

6
2. GDraw
2.1 List of GDraw Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

108 GPOffsetPoly void GPOffsetPoly.c Polygon offset processing
109 GPPhysicalToVirtualPoly void GPPhysicalToVirtualPoly.c Convert polygon physical
coordinates to virtual
coordinates
112 GMSetMemorySpace short GMemory.c Register memory area
information
113 GMDeleteMemorySpace short GMemory.c Delete registered memory area
114 GMMemoryAlloc void* GMemory.c Allocate memory area
115 GMMemoryFree short GMemory.c Release memory area
116 GDCreateVram HGVRA GDCreateVram.c Create virtual VRAM
M
117 GDDeleteVram void GDDeleteVram.c Release virtual VRAM
118 GDFlushScreenForce void GDFlushScreenForce.c Forcible refresh screen
119 GDGetGradationInfo void GDGetGradationInfo.c Get gradation information
120 GDGetLocalOrigin void GDGetLocalOrigin.c Get local coordinate origin
121 GDGetVram HGVRA GDGetVram.c Get system VRAM
M
122 GDRemoveDrawableRegi short GDRemoveDrawableRegion. Delete rectangular area from
on c drawable area
123 GDSetDrawableRegion short GDSetDrawableRegion.c Set drawable area
124 GDSetGradationInfo void GDSetGradationInfo.c Set gradation information
125 GDSetLocalOrigin void GDSetLocalOrigin.c Set local coordinate origin

7
 2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

2.2 Outlines of GDraw Functions

GDBeginDraw

GDBeginDraw.c
Outline Begin drawing

Syntax void GDBeginDraw(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : draw handle

Return value None

Details This must be called just once when drawing on the screen for drawing basic
figures, displaying image data and the like.

File name GDBeginDraw.c

8
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDBitBlt

GDBitBlt.c
Outline Block transfer

Syntax void GDBitBlt(

HGDRAW hDraw,
HGVRAM hSrc,
short nSrcX,
short nSrcY,
short nWidth,
short nHeight,
HGVRAM hDest,
short nDestX,
short nDestY,
short nDrawingMode
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) HGVRAM hSrc : source VRAM handle
(i) short nSrcX : source X coordinate
(i) short nSrcY : source Y coordinate
(i) short nWidth : transmission area width
(i) short nHeight : transmission area height
(i) HGVRAM hDest : destination VRAM handle
(i) nDestX : destination X coordinate
(i) nDestY : destination Y coordinate
(i) nDrawingMode : raster operation

Return value None

Details Transfers the nWidth*nHeight sized area based on the specified point (nSrcX,
nSrcY) in the VRAM of the transmission source (hSrc) to the nWidth*nHeight
sized area based on another specified point (nDestX, nDestY) in the
transmission destination (hDest).
The transfer method depends on nDrawingMode.
Corresponds to physical coordinates BitBlt only, and not virtual coordinates.

File name GDBitBlt.c

9
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDCalcBorderRect

GDCalcBorderRect.c
Outline Calculate rectangular area based on 3D border settings

Syntax void GDCalcBorderRect(

GRect *pBounds,
GRect *pInside,
GRect *pBorderRect,
GBorder *pBorder
)

Argument (i) GRect *pBounds : perimeter rectangle area

(o) GRect *pInside : rectangle area inside 3D border
(o) GRect *pBorderRect : 3D border area
(i) GBorder *pBorder : 3D border

Return value None

Details Calculates the position of the rectangle when a 3D border is drawn within
pBounds based on the pBorder settings.
The rectangular area within the 3D border is stored in plnside.
The perimeter rectangle for the 3D border is stored in pBorderRect.

File name GDCalcBorderRect.c

GDCloseDrawHandle

GDCloseDrawHandle.c
Outline Release drawing handle

Syntax void GDCloseDrawHandle(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle to be released

Return value None

Details The drawing handle is released.

File name GDCloseDrawHandle.c

10
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDefineFillPattern

GDDefineFillPattern.c
Outline Define fill pattern

Syntax void GDDefineFillPattern(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nFillPattern,
char *pcPattern
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nFillPattern : fill pattern specification
(i) char *pcPattern : fill pattern definition

Return value None

Details Set pcPattern in nFillPattern No. fill pattern.

When a pattern No. outside of the range is set,
GERROR_BAD_PATTERN_NUM is set as the error.

File name GDDefineFillPattern.c

11
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDefinePenDash

GDDefinePenDash.c
Outline Define line pattern

Syntax void GDDefinePenDash(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nPenDash,
char *pcDash
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nPenDash : line pattern No. specification
(i) char *pcDash : line pattern

Return value None

Details Set pcDash in nPenDash No. line pattern.

Since nPenDash number 0 is set to solid line, specify 1 or higher.

File name GDDefinePenDash.c

12
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawArc

GDDrawArc.c
Outline Draw arc

Syntax void GDDrawArc(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect,
short nStartAngle,
short nEndAngle
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area
(i) short nStartAngle : 10 times of the starting angle
(i) short nEndAngle : 10 times of the ending angle

Return value None

Details Draws an arc in contact with the inside of the rectangle defined with pgrRect.
The starting angle is nStartAngle, and the ending angle is nEndAngle.
Line color, line type, line thickness and raster operation are enabled as drawing
attributes.

File name GDDrawArc.c

13
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawBezier

GDDrawBezier.c
Outline Draw Bezier curve

Syntax void GDDrawBezier(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoly *pgpPoly
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GPoly *pgpPoly : polygon structure

Return value None

Details Draws a Bezier curve joining the points defined with pgpPoly.
Line color, line type, line thickness and raster operation are enabled as drawing
attributes.

File name GDDrawBezier.c

14
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawCaptionCursorString

GDDrawCaptionCursorString.c
Outline Draw caption character string (with cursor display)

Syntax void GDDrawCaptionCursorString(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pBounds,
GCaption * pCaption,
GCursor *pCursor,
long lCursorPos,
char *pString
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle area
(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information
(i/o) GCursor *pCursor : data with cursor displayed
(i) long lCursorPos : character cursor display position
(i) char *pString : character string

Return value None

Details pString character string is drawn with the cursor displayed according to the
pCaption settings so that it fills the pBounds rectangular area.

File name GDDrawCaptionCursorString.c

15
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawCaptionString

GDDrawCaptionString.c
Outline Draw caption character string

Syntax void GDDrawCaptionString(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pBounds,
GCaption *pCaption,
char *pString
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle area
(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information
(i) char *pString : character string

Return value None

Details pString character string is drawn according to the pCaption settings so that it
fills the pBounds rectangular area.

File name GDDrawCaptionString.c

16
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawCaptionStringResource

GDDrawCaptionStringResource.c
Outline Draw caption based on character string resources

Syntax void GDDrawCaptionStringResource(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pBounds,
GCaption *pCaption,
unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle area
(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information
(i) unsigned short usResourceID : character string resource ID

Return value None

Details usResourceID resource character string is drawn according to the pCaption

settings so that it fills the pBounds rectangular area.

File name GDDrawCaptionStringResource.c

17
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawGrf

GDDrawGrf.c
Outline Draw BMP

Syntax short GDDrawGrf(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRFHeader *pGHeader,
unsigned char *pData,
short nX,
short nY,
short nWidth,
short nHeight
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRFHeader *pGHeader : BMP information structure
(i) unsigned char *pData : BMP data
(i) short nX : coordinates for starting drawing
(upper left of BMP)
(i) short nY : coordinates for starting drawing
(upper left of BMP)
(i) short nWidth : display all when drawing area size is 0 or lower
(i) short nHeight : display all when drawing area size is 0 or lower

Return value FALSE : drawing failed

TRUE : drawing succeeded

Details The pData image having pGHeader information is drawn in the size of
nWidth*nHeight starting at (nX,nY).
When 0 is specified for nWidth, it is displayed in the size of the image.
When 0 is specified for nHeight, it is displayed in the size of the image.

File name GDDrawGrf.c

18
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawImage

GDDrawImage.c
Outline Draw image

Syntax void GDDrawImage(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GImage *pImage,
short nX,
short nY,
short nWidth,
shor nHeight
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GImage *pImage : image
(i) short nX : drawing start position (x coordinate)
(i) short nY : drawing start position (y coordinate)
(i) short nWidth : drawing area width
(i) short nHeight : drawing area height

Return value None

Details Draws the GImage image in the size of nWidth*nHeight starting at (nX, nY).
GImage contains the data for any of the images that are supported in the GUI
library as standard format data, and the processing function is called according
to the type of image.
At present this is only Graphic Raster Format (GRF)

File name GDDrawImage.c

19
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawImageResource

GDDrawImageResource.c
Outline Draw resource image

Syntax void GDDrawImageResource(

HGDRAW hDraw,
unsigned short usResourceID,
short nX,
short nY,
short nWidth,
short nHeight
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) usResourceID : image resource ID
(i) short nX : drawing start position (X coordinate)
(i) short nY : drawing start position (Y coordinate)
(i) short nWidth : drawing area width
(i) short nHeight : drawing area height

Return value None

Details Draws the usResourceID resource image in the size of nWidth*nHeight starting
at (nX, nY).

File name GDDrawImageResource.c

20
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawOval

GDDrawOval.c
Outline Draw oval

Syntax void GDDrawOval(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Draws an (oval) circle in contact with the inside of the rectangle defined with
pgrRect.
For the fill inside the shape, the fill pattern, foreground color and background
color, and for the perimeter, line color, line thickness, line type and raster
operation are enabled as drawing attributes.

File name GDDrawOval.c

21
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawOvalBorder

GDDrawOvalBorder.c
Outline Draw (oval) circular 3D border

Syntax void GDDrawOvalBorder(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pBounds,
GRect *pInside,
GBorder *pBorder,
short nStatus
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle area
(i) GRect *pInside : rectangle in contact inside
(i) GBorder *pBorder : 3D border
(i) short nStatus : status
FALSE : convex status
TRUE : concave status

Return value None

Details Draws the 3D border in pBorder in an (oval) circle shape in the size of the
rectangle in contact with the inside of the rectangular area in pBounds. When, in
this instance, nStatus is FALSE, filling of the upper left and lower right borders is
done with the colors that have been set, but if it is TRUE, the colors for filling of
the upper left and lower right borders is reversed.

File name GDDrawOvalBorder.c

22
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawOvalBorderResource

GDDrawOvalBorderResource.c
Outline Draw (oval) circular resource 3D border

Syntax void GDDrawOvalBorderResource(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pBounds,
GRect *pInside,
unsigned short usResourceID,
short nStatus
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle area
(i) GRect *pInside : rectangle in contact inside
(i) unsigned short usResourceID : 3D border resource ID
(i) short nStatus : status
FALSE : convex status
TRUE : concave status

Return value None

Details Draws the 3D border in usResourceID in an (oval) circle shape in the size of the
rectangle in contact with the inside of the rectangular area in pBounds. When, in
this instance, nStatus is FALSE, filling of the upper left and lower right borders is
done with the colors that have been set, but if it is TRUE, the colors for filling of
the upper left and lower right borders is reversed.

File name GDDrawOvalBorderResource.c

23
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawPie

GDDrawPie.c
Outline Draw sector

Syntax void GDDrawPie(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect,
short nStartAngle,
short nEndAngle
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area
(i) short nStartAngle : 10 times of the starting angle
(i) short nEndAngle : 10 times of the ending angle

Return value None

Details Draws a sector in contact with the inside of the rectangle defined with pgrRect.
The starting angle is nStartAngle, and the ending angle is nEndAngle.
For the fill inside the shape, the fill pattern, foreground color and background
color, and for the perimeter, line color, line thickness, line type and raster
operation are enabled as drawing attributes.

File name GDDrawPie.c

24
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawPoly

GDDrawPoly.c
Outline Draw polygon

Syntax void GDDrawPoly(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoly *pgpPoly
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GPoly *pgpPoly : polygon structure

Return value None

Details Draws the polygon defined in pgpPoly.

For the fill inside the shape, the fill pattern, foreground color and background
color, and for the perimeter, line color, line thickness, line type and raster
operation are enabled as drawing attributes.

File name GDDrawPoly.c

GDDrawRect

GDDrawRect.c
Outline Draw rectangle

Syntax void GDDrawRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Draws the rectangle in the rectangular area defined in pgrRect.

For the fill inside the shape, the fill pattern, foreground color and background
color, and for the perimeter, line color, line thickness, line type and raster
operation are enabled as drawing attributes.

File name GDDrawRect.c

25
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawRectBorder

GDDrawRectBorder.c
Outline Draw rectangular 3D border

Syntax void GDDrawRectBorder(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pBounds,
GRect *pInside,
GBorder *pBorder,
short nStatus
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle area
(i) GRect *pInside : rectangle in contact inside
(i) GBorder *pBorder : 3D border
(i) short nStatus : status
FALSE : convex status
TRUE : concave status

Return value None

Details Draws a 3D border in pBorder in an rectangle in the size of the rectangle in

contact with the inside of the rectangular area in pBounds.
When, in this instance, nStatus is FALSE, filling of the upper left and lower right
borders is done with the colors that have been set, but if it is TRUE, the colors
for filling of the upper left and lower right borders is reversed.

File name GDDrawRectBorder.c

26
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawRectBorderResource

GDDrawRectBorderResource.c
Outline Draw resource rectangular 3D border

Syntax void GDDrawRectBorderResource(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pBounds,
GRect *pInside,
unsigned short usResourceID,
short nStatus
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle area
(i) GRect *pInside : rectangle in contact inside
(i) unsigned short usResourceID : 3D border
(i) short nStatus : status
FALSE : convex status
TRUE : concave status

Return value None

Details Draws a border in usResourceID in a rectangle in the size of the rectangle in

contact with the inside of the rectangular area in pBounds. When, in this
instance, nStatus is FALSE, filling of the upper left and lower right borders is
done with the colors that have been set, but if it is TRUE, the colors for filling of
the upper left and lower right borders is reversed.

File name GDDrawRectBorderResource.c

27
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawRRect

GDDrawRRect.c
Outline Draw rounded corner rectangle

Syntax void GDDrawRRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area
(i) short nX : X axis of corner arc
(i) short nY : Y axis of corner arc

Return value None

Details Draws the rounded corner rectangle in the rectangular area defined in pgrRect.
The rounding of the corners is defined with nX and nY.
For the fill inside the shape, the fill pattern, foreground color and background
color, and for the perimeter, line color, line thickness, line type and raster
operation are enabled as drawing attributes.

File name GDDrawRRect.c

28
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDDrawString

GDDrawString.c
Outline Draw character string

Syntax void GDDrawString(

HGDRAW hDraw,
char *pszString
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) char *pszString : draw character string

Return value None

Details Draws the pszString character string starting at the current pen position.
Pen color, background color and text mode are enabled as the drawing
attributes.

File name GDDrawString.c

GDDrawStringResource

GDDrawStringResource.c
Outline Draw resource character string

Syntax void GDDrawStringResource(

HGDRAW hDraw,
unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) unsigned short usResourceID : draw resource character string

Return value None

Details Draws the usResourceID resource character string starting at the current pen
position.
Pen color, background color and text mode are enabled as the drawing
attributes.

File name GDDrawStringResource.c

29
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDEndDraw

GDEndDraw.c
Outline End drawing

Syntax void GDEndDraw(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

Return value None

Details Quits screen drawing. This is called after drawing on the screen for basic figure
drawing, data display and the like.

File name GDEndDraw.c

GDFlushScreen

GDFlushScreen.c
Outline Refresh screen

Syntax void GDFlushScreen(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nX,
short nY,
short nWidth,
short nHeight
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate for drawing starting point
(i) short nY : Y coordinate for drawing starting point
(i) short nWidth : drawing width
(i) short nHeight : drawing height

Return value None

Details A screen for the size of nWidth*nHeight is refreshed in the current coordinate
system with (nX, nY) as the starting point.

File name GDFlushScreen.c

30
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetCharHeight

GDGetCharHeight.c
Outline Get specified character height

Syntax short GDGetCharHeight(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nCharCode
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nCharCode : character code

Return value Character height

Details Get specified character height with current font settings.

File name GDGetCharHeight.c

GDGetCharWidth

GDGetCharWidth.c
Outline Get specified character width

Syntax short GDGetCharWidth(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nCharCode
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nCharCode : character code

Return value Character width

Details Get specified character width with current font settings.

File name GDGetCharWidth.c

31
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetNextChar

GDGetNextChar.c
Outline Get next character

Syntax char* GDGetNextChar(

HGDRAW hDraw,
char *pszString,
char *pszNow
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) char *pszString : character string
(i) char *pszNow : character position - starting point for the next
character search

Return value Pointer to the next character of the specified character

Details Searches for the next character using the specified character in the specified
character string as the starting point.

File name GDGetNextChar.c

32
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetPalette

GDGetPalette.c
Outline Get palette color code

Syntax void GDGetPalette(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nStart,
short nCount,
GColor *pgcColorArray
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nStart : starting No. to get
(i) short nCount : number of colors to get
(o) GColor *pgcColorArray : array storing color code

Return value None

Details nCount color codes starting at nStart in the color pallet are acquired in
pgcColorArray.

File name GDGetPalette.c

33
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetPixel

GDGetPixel.c
Outline Get color code for specified coordinates

Syntax GColor GDGetPixel(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate
(i) short nY : Y coordinate

Return value Color code

Details Gets the color code for (nX, nY).

The color code depends on the current color environment.

File name GDGetPixel.c

34
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetPrevChar

GDGetPrevChar.c
Outline Get previous character

Syntax char* GDGetPrevChar(

HGDRAW hDraw,
char * pszString,
char * pszNow
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) char *pszString : character string
(i) char *pszNow : character position - starting point for the previous
character search
Character position

Return value Pointer to the previous character of the specified character

Details Searches for the previous character using the specified character in the
specified character string as the starting point.

File name GDGetPrevChar.c

GDGetStringLength

GDGetStringLength.c
Outline Get character length

Syntax unsigned long GDGetStringLength(

HGDRAW hDraw,
char *pszString
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) char *pszString : character string in which the characters are to be
counted

Return value Number of characters

Details Gets the number of characters in the specified character string.

File name GDGetStringLength.c

35
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetStringWidth

GDGetStringWidth.c
Outline Get specified character width

Syntax short GDGetStringWidth(

HGDRAW hDraw,
char *pszString
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) char *pszString : character string

Return value Character string width

Details Gets the width of a character string specified by pszString.

File name GDGetStringWidth.c

36
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDInceptClipRect

GDInceptClipRect.c
Outline Clip the area of overlap between the specified rectangle and the current clip
area

Syntax short GDInceptClipRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrClip,
GRect *pOldClip
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrClip : rectangle area
(o) GRect *pOldClip : clip area before change

Return value FALSE : clipping failed

TRUE : clipping succeeded

Details Defines the portion of overlap between the pgrClip rectangular area displaying
characters or graphics on the screen and the current clip area.
The clip area up to that point is stored in pOldClip.
Either physical or virtual coordinates can be used for the clip area, and the
setting is applied to the coordinate system at the time this function is called.

File name GDInceptClipRect.c

GDInitPlatform

GDInitPlatform.c
Outline Carrying out initialization processing for GUI library environment

Syntax short GDInitPlatform(

void *pParameter
)

Argument (i) void* pParameter : additional platform information

Return value FALSE : initialization failed

TRUE : initialization succeeded

Details Initializes the platform that uses the GUI library.

File name GDInitPlatform.c

37
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDLineTo

GDLineTo.c
Outline Draw line

Syntax void GDLineTo(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate
(i) short nY : Y coordinate

Return value None

Details Draws a line from the current pen position to (nX, nY).

File name GDLineTo.c

GDMoveTo

GDMoveTo.c
Outline Move pen position

Syntax void GDMoveTo(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate
(i) short nY : Y coordinate

Return value None

Details Moves pen position to (nX, nY).

File name GDMoveTo.c

38
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDOffsetLocalOrigin

GDOffsetLocalOrigin.c
Outline Offset to local coordinate origin

Syntax void GDOffsetLocalOrigin(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoint *pgptPoint
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

Return value None

Details An offset of pgptPoint.nX in the X direction and pgptPoint.nY in the Y direction

is applied to the origin for the local (physical) coordinates.

File name GDOffsetLocalOrigin.c

GDOpenDrawHandle

GDOpenDrawHandle.c
Outline Get drawing handle

Syntax HGDRAW GDOpenDrawHandle(

short nType,
void *pParameter
)

Argument (i) short nType : display mode

(i) void *pParameter : additional handle information

Return value NULL : acquisition failed

Other than NULL : drawing handle

Details Gets the drawing handle.

File name GDOpenDrawHandle.c

39
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDQueryError

GDQueryError.c
Outline Get final error code

Syntax unsigned short GDQueryError(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

Return value Error No.

Details The final error code within the GUI library is acquired.

File name GDQueryError.c

GDQuitPlatform

GDQuitPlatform.c
Outline Quit processing for GUI library environment

Syntax short GDQuitPlatform()

Argument None

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Carries out end processing for the platform environment used by the GUI
library.

File name GDQuitPlatform.c

40
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetBackColor

GDSetBackColor.c
Outline Set background color

Syntax void GDSetBackColor(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GColor gcBackColor
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GColor gcBackColor : background color to be set

Return value None

Details Sets the background color.

When NO_DRAW is set for the background color, the background color pixels
are not filled in during drawing.
NO_DRAW : no background fill
Color code : fill background using specified color code

File name GDSetBackColor.c

GDSetBrush

GDSetBrush.c
Outline Set brush

Syntax void GDSetBrush(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GBrush *pBrush
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GBrush *pBrush : brush being set

Return value None

Details The brush to be used is set as a fill attribute.

The brush set is registered as a fill pattern, foreground color and background
color setting.

File name GDSetBrush.c

41
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetClipRect

GDSetClipRect
Outline Define clipping area

Syntax void GDSetClipRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrClip
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrClip : rectangle area

Return value None

Details A rectangular area for displaying characters or graphics on the screen is set as
pgrClip.
Either physical or virtual coordinates can be used for the clip area, and the
setting is applied to the coordinate system at the time this function is called.

File name GDSetClipRect.c

GDSetDisplay

GDSetDisplay.c
Outline Set graphics mode

Syntax short GDSetDisplay(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nType
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nType : graphics mode to be set

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the graphics mode.

The mode depends on the platform, so it is not defined as the GUI library.

File name GDSetDisplay.c

42
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetDrawingMode

GDSetDrawingMode.c
Outline Set raster operations for drawing

Syntax void GDSetDrawingMode(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nMode
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nMode : raster operation

Return value None

Details Sets the raster operation for drawing.

GRASTER_OPERATION_REPLACE : overwrite
GRASTER_OPERATION_AND : AND with base
GRASTER_OPERATION_OR : OR with base
GRASTER_OPERATION_XOR : XOR with base

File name GDSetDrawingMode.c

43
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetFillAttribute

GDSetFillAttribute.c
Outline Set fill attributes

Syntax void GDSetFillAttribute(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nPattern,
GColor gcForeColor,
GColor gcBackColor
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nPattern : fill pattern
(i) GColor gcForeColor : foreground color
(i) GColor gcBackColor : background color

Return value None

Details Sets the fill attributes.

nPattern
NO_DRAW : no fill
FILL_FORE_COLOR : fill with single foreground color
FILL_BACK_COLOR : fill with single background color
0 to 37 : fill using pattern for specified No.
gcForeColor
NO_DRAW : no foreground fill
Color code : fill foreground using specified color code
gcBackColor
NO_DRAW : no background fill
Color code : fill background using specified color code

File name GDSetFillAttribute.c

44
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetFillColor

GDSetFillColor.c
Outline Set colors for foreground and background

Syntax void GDSetFillColor(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GColor gcForeColor,
GColor gcBackColor
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GColor gcForeColort : foreground color to be se
(i) GColor gcBackColor : background color to be set

Return value None

Details Sets the foreground color and background color.

gcForeColor
NO_DRAW : no foreground fill
Color code : fill foreground using specified color code
gcBackColor
NO_DRAW : no background fill
Color code : fill background using specified color code

File name GDSetFillColor.c

45
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetFillPattern

GDSetFillPattern.c
Outline Set fill pattern

Syntax void GDSetFillPattern(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nPattern
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nPattern : fill pattern

Return value None

Details Sets the fill pattern.

nPattern
NO_DRAW : no fill
FILL_FORE_COLOR : fill with single foreground color
FILL_BACK_COLOR : fill with single background color
0 to 37 : fill using pattern for specified No.

File name GDSetFillPattern.c

46
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetFont

GDSetFont.c
Outline Set font

Syntax short GDSetFont(

HGDRAW hDraw,
HGFONT hFont
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) HGFONT hFont : font handle

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Set the hFont font as the font for character drawing.

File name GDSetFont.c

GDSetForeColor

GDSetForeColor.c
Outline Set foreground color

Syntax void GDSetForeColor(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GColor gcForeColor
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GColor gcForeColor : foreground color to be set

Return value None

Details Sets the foreground color.

gcForeColor
NO_DRAW : no foreground fill
Color code : fill foreground using specified color code

File name GDSetForeColor.c

47
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetLocalMode

GDSetLocalMode.c
Outline Set to local (physical) coordinate system

Syntax void GDSetLocalMode(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

Return value None

Details Sets the coordinate system to local (physical) coordinates.

After the coordinate system is set to local coordinates, all GUI library functions
are executed using the local (physical) coordinates system.

File name GDSetLocalMode.c

GDSetPenColor

GDSetPenColor.c
Outline Set line and character color

Syntax void GDSetPenColor(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GColor gcPenColor
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GColor gcPenColor : color to be set for lines/characters

Return value None

Details Sets the color for lines and characters.

gcPenColor
NO_DRAW : no drawing
Color code : draw lines and characters using the specified color code

File name GDSetPenColor.c

48
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetPenDash

GDSetPenDash.c
Outline Set line pattern

Syntax void GDSetPenDash(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nDash
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nDash : line pattern

Return value None

Details Specifies the line pattern to use when drawing lines.

nDash
0 : solid line
1 to 8 : defined line pattern

File name GDSetPenDash.c

49
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetPenJoin

GDSetPenJoin.c
Outline Specify joint for rectangles and polygons + D968

Syntax void GDSetPenJoin(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nJoin
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nJoin : type of joint

Return value None

Details Specifies the joint for rectangle and polygon perimeters.

nJoin
NONE : none
BEVEL : line
ROUND : rounded corners

File name GDSetPenJoin.c

50
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetPenSize

GDSetPenSize.c
Outline Set line width (pen size)

Syntax void GDSetPenSize(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nX : thickness in X direction
(i) short nY : thickness in Y direction

Return value None

Details Sets the thickness of lines and perimeter lines.

nX is the horizontal thickness, and nY is the vertical thickness.

File name GDSetPenSize.c

GDSetPixel

GDSetPixel.c
Outline Draw pixels

Syntax void GDSetPixel(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate
(i) short nY : Y coordinate

Return value None

Details Draws a point in the specified (nX, nY) coordinates.

After point drawing, the current position changes to the specified position.

File name GDSetPixel.c

51
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetSimpleFont

GDSetSimpleFont.c
Outline Set simple font

Syntax HGFONT GDSetSimpleFont(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GSimpleFont *pFont
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i)GSimpleFont *pFont : set simple font

Return value Font handle set

Details Changes the current font to a simple font pFont.

File name GDSetSimpleFont.c

GDSetSimpleFontResource

GDSetSimpleFontResource.c
Outline Set resource simple font

Syntax HGFONT GDSetSimpleFontResource(

HGDRAW hDraw,
unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) unsigned short usResourceID : set simple font

Return value Font handle set

Details Changes the current font to a resource simple font usResourceID.

File name GDSetSimpleFontResource.c

52
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetVirtualMode

GDSetVirtualMode.c
Outline Set to virtual coordinate system

Syntax void GDSetVirtualMode(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

Return value None

Details The coordinate system is set to the virtual coordinate system.

After the coordinate system is set to the virtual coordinate system, all GUI
library functions are executed using the virtual coordinate system.

File name GDSetVirtualMode.c

GDSetVirtualRect

GDSetVirtualRect.c
Outline Set rectangular area in virtual coordinates

Syntax void GDSetVirtualRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrVirtual
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrVirtual : virtual coordinate rectangle area

Return value None

Details The rectangular area for the virtual coordinate system is set in pgrVirtual.

File name GDSetVirtualRect.c

53
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetVram

GDSetVram.c
Outline Set VRAM for drawing destination

Syntax short GDSetVram(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nType,
HGVRAM hVram
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nType
DEFAULT_SCREEN : set actual VRAM for drawing destination
MEMORY_SCREEN : set virtual VRAM for drawing destination
(i) HGVRAM hVram : VRAM handle when specifying virtual VRAM

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details The drawing destination VRAM is specified in hVram.

File name GDSetVram.c

GFGetFontAttribute

GFGetFontAttribute.c
Outline Get font attributes

Syntax short GFGetFontAttribute(

HGFONT hFont,
GFontAttribute *pgfaAttribute
)

Argument (i) HGFONT hFont : font

(o) GFontattribute *pgfaAttribute : attribute

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Gets the attributes for the font handle font.

File name GFGetFontAttribute.c

54
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GFGetFontCount

GFGetFontCount.c
Outline Get number of fonts that can be used

Syntax short GFGetFontCount()

Argument None

Return value Number of fonts

Details This is supported by the current platform.

Gets fonts.

File name GFGetFontCount.c

GFGetFontInformation

GFGetFontInformation.c
Outline Get font information for the specified number

Syntax short GFGetFontInformation(

short nIndex,
GFont **pgfFont
)

Argument (i) short nIndex : font No.

(o) GFont **pgfFont : font information

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details This is supported by the platform.

Gets the font information for the specified font No.

File name GFGetFontInformation.c

55
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GFGetFontUserAttribute

GFGetFontUserAttribute.c
Outline Get user font attributes

Syntax short GFGetFontUserAttribute(

HGFONT hFont,
short *pnAttributeArray
)

Argument (i) HGFONT hFont : font

(o) short *pnAttributeArray : attribute unique to platform

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Gets the font attributes peculiar to the font handle.

File name GFGetFontUserAttribute.c

GFGetSize

GFGetSize.c
Outline Get font size

Syntax short GFGetSize(

HGFONT hFont,
short *nWidth,
short *nHeight
)

Argument (i) HGFONT hFont : font

(o) short *nWidth : width
(o) short *nHeight : height

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Gets the current font size for the specified font handle.

File name GFGetSize.c

56
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GFLoadFont

GFLoadFont.c
Outline Load specified font

Syntax HGFONT GFLoadFont(

char *pszFontName
)

Argument (i) char *pszFontName : font name

Return value Font handle

Details Sets the specified font to a usable status and returns the handle.

File name GFLoadFont.c

GFReleaseFont

GFReleaseFont.c
Outline Release font

Syntax void GFReleaseFont(

HGFONT hFont
)

Argument (i) HGFONT hFont : font

Return value None

Details Releases the font for the specified handle.

File name GFReleaseFont.c

57
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GFSetFontAttribute

GFSetFontAttribute.c
Outline Set font attributes

Syntax short GFSetFontAttribute(

HGFONT hFont,
GFontAttribute *pgfaAttribute
)

Argument (i) HGFONT hFont : font

(i) GFontattribute *pgfaAttribute : attribute

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Sets the attributes for the specified font.

File name GFSetFontAttribute.c

GFSetFontUserAttribute

GFSetFontUserAttribute.c
Outline Set font user attributes

Syntax short GFSetFontUserAttribute(

HGFONT hFont,
short *pnAttributeArray
)

Argument (i) HGFONT hFont : font

(i) short *pnAttributeArray : attribute unique to platform

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Sets the font attributes peculiar to the font handle.

File name GFSetFontUserAttribute.c

58
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GFSetSize

GFSetSize.c
Outline Set character size

Syntax short GFSetSize(

HGFONT hFont,
short nWidth,
short nHeight
)

Argument (i) HGFONT hFont : font being specified

(i) short nWidth : width
(i) short nHeight : height

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Sets the character size for the specified font.

File name GFSetSize.c

GRDuplicateRect

GRDuplicateRect.c
Outline Copy rectangle

Syntax void GRDuplicateRect(

GRect *pgrSrc,
GRect *pgrDest
)

Argument (i) GRect *pgrSrc : copy source

(o) GRect *pgrDest : copy destination

Return value None

Details Copies the rectangular area defined in pgrSrc to the pgrDest rectangular area.

File name GRDuplicateRect.c

59
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GREqualRect

GREqualRect.c
Outline Confirm that rectangle areas are the same

Syntax short GREqualRect(

GRect *pgrSrc1,
GRect *pgrSrc2
)

Argument (i) GRect *pgrSrc1 : rectangle area

(i) GRect *pgrSrc2 : rectangle area

Return value FALSE : not the same

TRUE : same

Details Finds out if the rectangular areas defined in pgrSrc1 and pgrSrc2 are the same.

File name GREqualRect.c

60
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRGetRect

GRGetRect.c
Outline Get rectangle area

Syntax void GRGetRect(

GRect *pgrRect,
short *nX1,
short *nY1,
short *nX2,
short *nY2
)

Argument (i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

(o) short *nX1 : X coordinate for upper left corner
(o) short *nY1 : Y coordinate for upper left corner
(o) short *nX2 : X coordinate for lower right corner
(o) short *nY2 : Y coordinate for lower right corner

Return value None

Details Gets the rectangle area.

The rectangle's upper left corner coordinates will be set in (nX1, nY1) and the
lower right corner coordinates will be set in (nX2, nY2).

File name GRGetRect.c

61
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRInceptRect

GRInceptRect.c
Outline Confirm rectangular area overlap

Syntax short GRInceptRect(

GRect *pgrSrc1,
GRect *pgrSrc2,
GRect *pgrDest
)

Argument (i) GRect *pgrSrc1 : rectangle area

(i) GRect *pgrSrc2 : rectangle area
(o) GRect *pgrDest : rectangle area

Return value FALSE : pgrSrc1 and pgrSrc2 do not overlap. (pgrDest not determined)
TRUE : pgrSrc1 and pgrSrc2 overlap.

Details Finds out if the two rectangular areas in pgrSrc1 and pgrSrc2 overlap.
If they overlap, set that area in pgrDest.

File name GRInceptRect.c

62
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRMapRect

GRMapRect.c
Outline Enlarge/reduce rectangular area

Syntax void GRMapRect(

GRect *pgrRect,
GRect *pgrFrom,
GRect *pgrTo
)

Argument (i/o) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

(i) GRect *pgrFrom : rectangle area
(i) GRect *pgrTo : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Converts the rectangular area defined in pgrRect in the same proportion as the
conversion of the rectangular area defined in pgrFrom to the rectangular area
defined in PgrTo.

File name GRMapRect.c

GRMapToScreenRect

GRMapToScreenRect.c
Outline Convert rectangular area defined in pgrRect to actual screen coordinate system

Syntax void GRMapToScreenRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle

Return value None

Details Converts the rectangular area defined in pgrRect to the actual screen
coordinate system

File name GRMapToScreenRect.c

63
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRMapToVirtualRect

GRMapToVirtualRect.c
Outline Convert the rectangular area defined in pgrRect to the virtual screen coordinate
system

Syntax void GRMapToVirtualRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangular area

Return value None

Details Converts the rectangular area defined in pgrRect to the virtual screen
coordinate system

File name GRMapToVirtualRect.c

GROffsetRect

GROffsetRect.c
Outline Rectangle offset processing

Syntax void GROffsetRect(

GRect *pgrRect,
short nDx,
short nDy
)

Argument (i/o) GRect *pgrRect : source rectangular area

(i) short nDx : increase in X direction
(i) short nDy : increase in Y direction

Return value None

Details Moves the rectangle defined in pgrRect nDx and nDy in the X direction and Y
direction, respectively.

File name GROffsetRect.c

64
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRPhysicalToVirtualRect

GRPhysicalToVirtualRect.c
Outline Convert rectangle physical coordinates to virtual coordinates

Syntax void GRPhysicalToVirtualRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Converts the rectangular area defined in pgrRect from physical (local)
coordinates to virtual coordinates.

File name GRPhysicalToVirtualRect.c

GRPointInRect

GRPointInRect.c
Outline Check if point coordinates fall within rectangle coordinates

Syntax short GRPointInRect(

GPoint *pptPoint,
GRect *pgrRect
)

Argument (i) GPoint *pptPoint : point coordinates

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

Return value FALSE : not inside

TRUE : inside (including on the pgrRect)

Details Finds out if the point coordinates defined in pptPoint are within the rectangular
area defined in pgrRect.

File name GRPointInRect.c

65
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRResizeRect

GRResizeRect.c
Outline Resize rectangle

Syntax void GRResizeRect(

GRect *pgrRect,
short nDx,
short nDy
)

Argument (i/o) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

(i) short nDx : increase in X direction
(i) short nDy : increase in Y direction

Return value None

Details nDx is subtracted from the initial X coordinate of pgrRect and nDx is added to
the final X coordinate.
Furthermore, nDy is subtracted from the initial Y coordinate and nDy is added
to the final Y coordinate.

File name GRResizeRect.c

66
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRSetRect

GRSetRect.c
Outline Define rectangular area

Syntax void GRSetRect(

GRect *pgrRect,
short nX1,
short nY1,
short nX2,
short nY2
)

Argument (o) GRect *pgrRect1 : rectangle area

(i) short nX1 : X coordinate for upper left corner
(i) short nY1 : Y coordinate for upper left corner
(i) short nX2 : X coordinate for lower right corner
(i) short nY2 : Y coordinate for lower right corner

Return value None

Details The coordinates for the rectangle’s upper left corner are specified as (nX1,
nY1) and those for the lower right corner as (nX2, nY2).

File name GRSetRect.c

67
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRShiftRect

GRShiftRect.c
Outline Rectangle shift processing

Syntax short GRShiftRect(

GRect *pgrRect,
short nDx,
short nDy,
GRect *pgrRect1,
GRect *pgrRect2
)

Argument (i) GRect *pgrRect : source rectangular area

(i) short nDx : increase in X direction
(i) short nDy : increase in Y direction
(o) GRect *pgrRect1 : empty rectangular area
(o) GRect *pgrRect2 : empty rectangular area

Return value 0 : no empty rectangular area

1 : one empty rectangular area
2 : two empty rectangular areas

Details Moves the rectangle defined in pgrRect nDx and nDy in the X direction and Y
direction, respectively.
Furthermore, the empty rectangular area created by the movement is set in
pgrRect1 and pgrRect2.

File name GRShiftRect.c

68
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GRUnionRect

GRUnionRect.c
Outline Join rectangle areas

Syntax void GRUnionRect(

GRect *pgrSrc1,
GRect *pgrSrc2,
GRect *pgrDest
)

Argument (i) GRect *pgrSrc1 : rectangle area

(i) GRect *pgrSrc2 : rectangle area
(o) GRect *pgrDest : combined rectangular area

Return value None

Details The minimum sized rectangular area surrounding the specified rectangular
areas pgrSrc1 and pgrSrc2 is set in pgrDest.

File name GRUnionRect.c

GRVirtualToPhysicalRect

GRVirtualToPhysicalRect.c
Outline Convert rectangular area virtual coordinates to physical coordinates

Syntax void GRVirtualToPhysicalRect(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect *pgrRect
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GRect *pgrRect : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Converts the rectangular area defined in pgrRect from virtual coordinates to
physical (local) coordinates.

File name GRVirtualToPhysicalRect.c

69
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GLDuplicateLine

GLDuplicateLine.c
Outline Copy line structure

Syntax void GLDuplicateLine(

GLine *pglSrc,
GLine *pglDest
)

Argument (i) GLine *pglSrc : copy source

(o) GLine *pglDest : copy destination

Return value None

Details The line structure defined in pglSrc is copied to the line structure in pglDest.

File name GLDuplicateLine.c

70
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GLGetLine

GLGetLine.c
Outline Get line

Syntax void GLGetLine(

GLine *pglLine,
short *nX1,
short *nY1,
short *nX2,
short *nY2
)

Argument (i) GLine *pglLine : source line structure being acquired

(o) short *nX1 : X coordinate for starting point of line structure
(o) short *nY1 : Y coordinate for starting point of line structure
(o) short *nX2 : X coordinate for ending point of line structure
(o) short *nY2 : Y coordinate for ending point of line structure

Return value None

Details Gets the content of the line structure pglLine in (nX1,nY1) and (nX2,nY2)

File name GLGetLine.c

71
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GLMapLine

GLMapLine.c
Outline Enlarge/reduce line coordinates

Syntax void GLMapLine(

GLine *pglLine,
GRect *pgrFrom,
GRect *pgrTo
)

Argument (i/o) GLine *pglLine : line structure

(i) GRect *pgrForm : rectangle area
(i) GRect *pgrTo : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Converts coordinates when the line structure in the pgrFrom rectangular area
will be projected onto to the pgrTo rectangular area.

File name GLMapLine.c

72
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GLOffsetLine

GLOffsetLine.c
Outline Offset processing for line structure

Syntax void GLOffsetLine(

GLine *pglLine,
short nDx,
short nDy
)

Argument (i/o) GLine *pglLine : source line

(i) short nDx : increase in X direction
(i) short nDy : increase in Y direction

Return value None

Details Moves the line defined in pglLine nDx and nDy in the X direction and Y
direction, respectively.

File name GLOffsetLine.c

GLPhysicalToVirtualLine

GLPhysicalToVirtualLine.c
Outline Convert line structure physical coordinates to virtual coordinates

Syntax void GLPhysicalToVirtualLine(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GLine *pglLine
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GLine *pglLine : line structure

Return value None

Details Converts the coordinates defined in pglLine from physical (local) coordinates to
virtual coordinates.

File name GLPhysicalToVirtualLine.c

73
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GLSetLine

GLSetLine.c
Outline Define line structure

Syntax void GLSetLine(

GLine *pglLine,
short nX1,
short nY1,
short nX2,
short nY2
)

Argument (o) GLine *pglLine : line structure

(i) short nX1 : X coordinate for starting point
(i) short nY1 : Y coordinate for starting point
(i) short nX2 : X coordinate for ending point
(i) short nY2 : Y coordinate for ending point

Return value None

Details Defines a line structure. The coordinates for the starting point of a line are
specified as (nX1, nY1) and those for the ending point as (nX2, nY2).

File name GLSetLine.c

74
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GLVirtualToPhysicalLine

GLVirtualToPhysicalLine.c
Outline Convert line structure virtual coordinates to physical coordinates

Syntax void GLVirtualToPhysicalLine(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GLine *pglLine
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GLine *pglLine : line structure

Return value None

Details Converts the coordinates defined in pglLine from virtual coordinates to physical
(local) coordinates.

File name GLVirtualToPhysicalLine.c

GPTDuplicatePoint

GPTDuplicatePoint.c
Outline Copy point structure

Syntax void GPTDuplicatePoint(

GPoint *pgptSrc,
GPoint *pgptDest
)

Argument (i) GPoint *pgptSrc : copy source

(o) GPoint *pgptDest : copy destination

Return value None

Details The point structure defined in pgptSrc is copied to pgptDest.

File name GPTDuplicatePoint.c

75
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPTGetPoint

GPTGetPoint.c
Outline Get point structure content

Syntax void GPTGetPoint(

GPoint *pgptPoint,
short *nX,
short *nY
)

Argument (i) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure for acquisition source

(o) short *nX : X coordinate for point structure
(o) short *nY : Y coordinate for point structure

Return value None

Details Gets the content of point structure pgptPoint in (nX, nY).

File name GPTGetPoint.c

GPTMapPoint

GPTMapPoint.c
Outline Relative conversion of point coordinates

Syntax void GPTMapPoint(

GPoint *pgptPoint,
GRect *pgrFrom,
GRect *pgrTo
)

Argument (i/o) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

(i) GRect *pgrFrom : rectangle area
(i) GRect *pgrTo : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Converts coordinates when the point structure in the pgrFrom rectangular area
will be projected onto to the pgrTo rectangular area.

File name GPTMapPoint.c

76
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPTMapToScreenPoint

GPTMapToScreenPoint.c
Outline Convert point structure to screen coordinates

Syntax void GPTMapToScreenPoint(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoint *pgptPoint
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GPoint *pgptPoint : point coordinates

Return value None

Details Converts the point defined in pgptPoint to the actual screen coordinate system.

File name GPTMapToScreenPoint.c

GPTMapToVirtualPoint

GPTMapToVirtualPoint.c
Outline Convert point defined in pgptPoint to virtual screen coordinate system

Syntax void GPTMapToVirtualPoint(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoint * pgptPoint
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

Return value None

Details Converts the point defined in pgptPoint to the virtual screen coordinate system.

File name GPTMapToVirtualPoint.c

77
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPTOffsetPoint

GPTOffsetPoint.c
Outline Point structure offset processing

Syntax void GPTOffsetPoint(

GPoint *pgptPoint,
short nDx,
short nDy
)

Argument (i/o) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure for movement source

(i) short nDx : increase in X direction
(i) short nDy : increase in Y direction

Return value None

Details Moves the point structure pgptPoint nDx and nDy in the X direction and Y
direction, respectively.

File name GPTOffsetPoint.c

GPTPhysicalToVirtualPoint

GPTPhysicalToVirtualPoint.c
Outline Convert point structure physical coordinates to virtual coordinates

Syntax void GPTPhysicalToVirtualPoint(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoint *pgptPoint
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

Return value None

Details Converts the point defined in pgptPoint from physical (local) coordinates to
virtual coordinates.

File name GPTPhysicalToVirtualPoint.c

78
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPTSetPoint

GPTSetPoint.c
Outline Define point structure

Syntax void GPTSetPoint(

GPoint *pgptPoint,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (o) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

(i) short nX : coordinate in X direction
(i) short nY : coordinate in Y direction

Return value None

Details Sets the (nX, nY) coordinates in the point structure pgptPoint.

File name GPTSetPoint.c

GPTVirtualToPhysicalPoint

GPTVirtualToPhysicalPoint.c
Outline Convert point structure virtual coordinates to physical coordinates

Syntax void GPTVirtualToPhysicalPoint(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoint *pgptPoint
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

Return value None

Details Converts the point specified by pgptPoint from virtual coordinates to physical
coordinates.

File name GPTVirtualToPhysicalPoint.c

79
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPGetPoly

GPGetPoly.c
Outline Get polygon settings

Syntax void GPGetPoly(

GPoly *pgpPolygon,
short *nNumPoints,
GPoint **pgptPoints,
GRect *pgrBounds
)

Argument (i) GPoly *pgpPolygon : polygon structure for acquisition source

(o) short *nNumPoints : number of vertices
(o) GPoint **pgptPoints : point structure
(o) GRect *pgrBounds : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Gets the polygon structure pgpPolygon content in nNumPoints, pgptPoints and
pgrBounds.

File name GPGetPoly.c

80
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPMapPoly

GPMapPoly.c
Outline Enlarge/reduce polygon

Syntax void GPMapPoly(

GPoly * pgpPolygon,
GRect * pgrFrom,
GRect * pgrTo
)

Argument (i/o) GPoly *pgpPolygon : polygon structure

(i) GRect *pgrFrom : rectangular area
(i) GRect *pgrTo : rectangular area

Return value None

Details Converts coordinates when the polygon structure in the pgrFrom rectangular
area will be projected onto to the pgrTo rectangular area.

File name GPMapPoly.c

81
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPOffsetPoly

GPOffsetPoly.c
Outline Polygon offset processing

Syntax void GPOffsetPoly(

GPoly *pgpPolygon,
short nDx,
short nDy
)

Argument (i/o) GPoly *pgpPolygon : polygon for movement source

(i) short nDx : increase in X direction
(i) short nDy : increase in Y direction

Return value None

Details Moves the polygon defined in pgpPolygon nDx and nDy in the X direction and Y
direction, respectively.

File name GPOffsetPoly.c

GPPhysicalToVirtualPoly

GPPhysicalToVirtualPoly.c
Outline Convert polygon physical coordinates to virtual coordinates

Syntax void GPPhysicalToVirtualPoly(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoly *pgpPolygon
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GPoly *pgpPolygon : polygon structure

Return value None

Details Converts the polygon structure defined in pgpPolygon from physical (local)
coordinates to virtual coordinates.

File name GPPhysicalToVirtualPoly.c

82
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GPSetPoly

GPSetPoly.c
Outline Define polygon

Syntax void GPSetPoly(

GPoly *pgpPolygon,
short nNumPoints,
GPoint *pgptPoints,
GRect *pgrBounds
)

Argument (o) GPoly *pgpPolygon : polygon structure

(i) short nNumPoints : number of vertices
(i) GPoint *pgptPoints : point structure
(i) GRect *pgrBounds : rectangle area

Return value None

Details Sets nNumPoints, pgptPoints and pgrBounds in the polygon structure

pgpPolygon.

File name GPSetPoly.c

GPVirtualToPhysicalPoly

GPVirtualToPhysicalPoly.c
Outline Convert polygon virtual coordinates to physical coordinates

Syntax void GPVirtualToPhysicalPoly(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoly *pgpPolygon
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i/o) GPoly *pgpPolygon : polygon structure

Return value None

Details Converts the polygon structure defined in pgpPolygon from virtual coordinates
to local (physical) coordinates.

File name GPVirtualToPhysicalPoly.c

83
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GMSetMemorySpace

GMemory.c
Outline Register memory area information

Syntax short GMSetMemorySpace(

unsigned char ucMemorySpaceCount,
GMemorySpaceInformation *paMemorySpace
)

Argument (i) unsigned char ucMemorySpaceCount

: number of pieces of data for memory area to be registered
(i) GMemorySpaceInformation *paMemorySpace
: pointer to memory area information array

Return value 0 : registration failed

1 or more : number of pieces of memory area data successfully registered

Details GMemorySpaceInformation is set in GUI library 2 for the number specified by

ucMemorySpaceCount. GMemorySpaceInformation is passed to
paMemorySpace as an array for the number specified by
ucMemorySpaceCount.
GPISetMemorySpace is called for the internal processing.

File name GMemory.c

84
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GMDeleteMemorySpace

GMemory.c
Outline Delete registered memory area

Syntax short GMDeleteMemorySpace(

unsigned char ucType,
unsigned char ucPlane
)

Argument (i) unsigned char ucType : memory area type to be deleted

(i) unsigned char ucPlane : memory plane No. for deletion

Return value FALSE : Deletion failed

TRUE : Deletion succeeded

Details The registered memory area specified by ucType and ucPlane is deleted.
GPIDeleteMemorySpace is called for the internal processing.

File name GMemory.c

85
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GMMemoryAlloc

GMemory.c
Outline Allocate memory area

Syntax void* GMMemoryAlloc(

unsigned char ucType,
unsigned char ucPlane,
unsigned long ulMemorySpaceSize
)

Argument (i) unsigned char ucType : type of memory area for memory
being allocated
GMEM_SPACE_GDRAW(1) : memory area used by Gdraw
GMEM_SPACE_GPI(4) : memory area used by GPI
GMEM_SPACE_GWIN(5) : memory area used by GWin
GMEM_SPACE_GWIN_PANEL(6) : memory area used by GWin base
GMEM_SPACE_GWIN_WINDOW(7) : memory area used by GWin
window
(i) unsigned char ucPlane : memory area plane No. for memory
being allocated
(i) unsigned long ulMemorySpaceSize : size of memory being allocated

Return value NULL : memory allocation failed

Other than NULL : start of address for memory allocated

Details Allocates memory of the specified size from the specified memory area.
When allocation fails, a NULL is returned as a return value.
GPIMemoryAlloc is called for the internal processing.

File name GMemory.c

86
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GMMemoryFree

GMemory.c
Outline Release memory area

Syntax short GMMemoryFree (

unsigned char ucType,
unsigned char ucPlane,
void* pvMemory *pvMemory
)

Argument (i) unsigned char ucType : type of memory area for memory to
be released
GMEM_SPACE_GDRAW(1) : memory area used by Gdraw
GMEM_SPACE_GPI(4) : memory area used by GPI
GMEM_SPACE_GWIN(5) : memory area used by GWin
GMEM_SPACE_GWIN_PANEL(6) : memory area used by GWin base
GMEM_SPACE_GWIN_WINDOW(7) : memory area used by GWin
window
GMEM_SPACE_USER(8) : memory area used by user
(i) unsigned char ucPlane : memory area plane No. for
memory being released
(i) void *pvMemory : address of memory being released

Return value FALSE : memory release failed

TRUE : memory release succeeded

Details Releases memory allocated from the specified memory area.

GPIMemoryFree is called for the internal processing.

File name GMemory.c

87
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDCreateVram

GDCreateVram.c
Outline Create virtual VRAM

Syntax HGVRAM GDCreateVram(

GVram *pVram
)

Argument (i) GVram *pVram : VRAM structure

Return value VRAM handle

Details Creates virtual VRAM based on the information set in the VRAM structure.

File name GDCreateVram.c

GDDeleteVram

GDDeleteVram.c
Outline Release virtual VRAM

Syntax void GDDeleteVram(

HGVRAM hVram
)

Argument (i/o) HGVRAM hVram : VRAM handle

Return value VRAM handle

Details Releases the virtual VRAM corresponding to the specified VRAM handle.

File name GDDeleteVram.c

88
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDFlushScreenForce

GDFlushScreenForce.c
Outline Forcible refresh screen

Syntax void GDFlushScreenForce(

HGDRAW hDraw,
short nX,
short nY,
short nWidth,
short nHeight
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate for drawing starting point
(i) short nY : Y coordinate for drawing starting point
(i) short nWidth : drawing area width
(i) short nHeight : drawing area height

Return value None

Details A screen for the size of nWidth*Height is forcibly refreshed in the current
coordinate system with the specified point (nX, nY) as the starting point.

File name GDFlushScreenForce.c

89
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetGradationInfo

GDGetGradationInfo.c
Outline Get gradation information

Syntax void GDGetGradationInfo(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GGradationInfo *pggInfo
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(o) GGradationInfo *pggInfo : gradation information structure

Return value None

Details Gets gradation information.

File name GDGetGradationInfo.c

GDGetLocalOrigin

GDGetLocalOrigin.c
Outline Get local coordinate origin

Syntax void GDGetLocalOrigin(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoint *pgptPoint
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(o) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

Return value None

Details Gets local (physical) coordinate origin.

File name GDGetLocalOrigin.c

90
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDGetVram

GDGetVram.c
Outline Get system VRAM

Syntax HGVRAM GDGetVram(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

Return value HGVRAM : system VRAM handle

Details Gets system VRAM.

File name GDGetVram.c

GDRemoveDrawableRegion

GDRemoveDrawableRegion.c
Outline Delete specified rectangular area from drawable area

Syntax short GDRemoveDrawableRegion(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect * pRect
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(o) GRect *pRect : rectangle area to be deleted

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Deletes the rectangular area specified by pRect from the drawable area held by
the platform.

File name GDRemoveDrawableRegion.c

91
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetDrawableRegion

GDSetDrawableRegion.c
Outline Set drawable area

Syntax short GDSetDrawableRegion(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GRect * pRect
)

Argument (i/o)HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i)GRect *pRect : rectangular area being set

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Sets the drawable area held by the platform.

File name GDSetDrawableRegion.c

GDSetGradationInfo

GDSetGradationInfo.c
Outline Set gradation information

Syntax void GDSetGradationInfo(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GGradationInfo *pggInfo
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GGradationInfo *pggInfo : gradation information structure

Return value None

Details Sets gradation information.

File name GDSetGradationInfo.c

92
2. GDraw
2.2 Descriptions of GDraw Functions

GDSetLocalOrigin

GDSetLocalOrigin.c
Outline Set local coordinate origin

Syntax void GDSetLocalOrigin(

HGDRAW hDraw,
GPoint *pgptPoint
)

Argument (i/o) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

(i) GPoint *pgptPoint : point structure

Return value None

Details Values for pgptPoint.nX in the X direction and pgptPoint.nY in the Y direction
are set for the origin for the local (physical) coordinates.

File name GDSetLocalOrigin.c

93
 3. GResource
3.1 List of GResource Functions

3. GResource

This section describes the GResource functions.

3.1 List of GResource Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

1 GRCLoadBorder GBorder * GRCLoadBorder.c Get specified ID 3D border resource
2 GRCLoadFont GSimpleFont * GRCLoadFont.c Get specified ID font resource
3 GRCLoadImage GImage * GRCLoadImage.c Get specified ID image resource
4 GRCLoadString char * GRCLoadString.c Get specified ID character string
resource
5 GRCLoadLocaleFont GSimpleFont * GRCLoadLocaleFont.c Get font resource for specified
locale specified ID
6 GRCLoadLocaleStrin GTCHAR * GRCLoadLocaleString. Get character string resource for
g c specified locale specified ID
7 GRCLoadPalette GPaletteHeader GRCLoadPalette.c Get specified ID palette resource
*
8 GRCSetLocale short GRCLocale.c Current locale setting
9 GRCGetLocale unsigned char GRCLocale.c Get current locale
10 GRCLoadFillPattern char * GRCLoadFillPattern.c Get fill pattern for specified No.
11 GRCLoadHtmlFileNa GFileName* GRCLoadHtmlFileNam Get HTML file name for specified ID
me e.c
12 GRCLoadLanguageS GTCHAR * GRCLoadLanguageStr. Get specified locale
tr c language-identifying character
strings resource
13 GRCLoadNowLangu GTCHAR * GRCLoadLanguageStr. Get current locale
ageStr c language-identifying character
strings resource
14 GRCLoadLinePattern char * GRCLoadLinePattern.c Get line drawing pattern for
specified No.
15 GRCSetResourceHa void GRCResourceHandle.c Set current resource handle
ndle
16 GRCGetResourceHa HGRESOURCE GRCResourceHandle.c Get current resource handle
ndle
17 GRCUnicodeToMulti unsigned long GRCUnicode.c UNICODE → multibyte conversion
Byte
18 GRCMultiByteToUnic unsigned long GRCUnicode.c Multibyte → UNICODE conversion
ode

94
 3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

3.2 Outlines of GResource Functions

GRCLoadBorder

GRCLoadBorder.c
Outline Get specified ID 3D border resource

Syntax GBorder *GRCLoadBorder(

unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Specified resource

Details Gets the pointer to the 3D border resource structure with the specified ID.

File name GRCLoadBorder.c

GRCLoadFont

GRCLoadFont.c
Outline Get specified ID font resource

Syntax GSimpleFont *GRCLoadFont(

unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Specified resource

Details Gets the pointer to the simple font resource structure with the specified ID.

File name GRCLoadFont.c

95
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCLoadImage

GRCLoadImage.c
Outline Get specified ID image resource

Syntax GImage *GRCLoadImage(

unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Specified resource

Details Gets the pointer to the image resource structure with the specified ID.

File name GRCLoadImage.c

GRCLoadString

GRCLoadString.c
Outline Get specified ID character string resource

Syntax char *GRCLoadString(

unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Specified resource

Details Gets the pointer to the character string resource structure with the specified ID.

File name GRCLoadString.c

96
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCLoadLocaleFont

GRCLoadLocaleFont.c
Outline Get font resource for specified locale specified ID

Syntax GSimpleFont *GRCLoadLocaleFont(

unsigned char ucLocale,
unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned char ucLocale : locale No.

(i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Pointer for the specified resource for the specified locale

Details Gets the pointer to the simple font resource structure with the specified locale
specified ID.

File name GRCLoadLocaleFont.c

GRCLoadLocaleString

GRCLoadLocaleString.c
Outline Get character string resource for specified locale specified ID

Syntax GTCHAR *GRCLoadLocaleString(

unsigned char ucLocale,
unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned char ucLocale : locale No.

(i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Pointer for the specified resource for the specified locale

Details Gets the pointer to character string resource with the specified ID for the
specified locale.

File name GRCLoadLocaleString.c

97
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCLoadPalette

GRCLoadPalette.c
Outline Get specified ID palette resource

Syntax GPaletteHeader *GRCLoadPalette(

unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Specified resource

Details Gets the pointer to resource structure with the specified ID.

File name GRCLoadPalette.c

GRCSetLocale

GRCLocale.c
Outline Current locale setting

Syntax short GRCSetLocale(

unsigned char ucNewLocale
)

Argument (i) unsigned char ucNewLocale : locale No. being set

Return value TRUE : setting succeeded

FALSE : setting failed

Details Sets the current locale.

File name GRCLocale.c

98
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCGetLocale

GRCLocale.c
Outline Get current locale

Syntax unsigned char GRCGetLocale()

Argument None

Return value Current locale No.

Details Gets the current locale.

File name GRCLocale.c

GRCLoadFillPattern

GRCLoadFillPattern.c
Outline Get fill pattern for specified No.

Syntax char *GRCLoadFillPattern(

unsigned short usIndex
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usIndex : fill No.

Return value Fill pattern with specified No.

Details Gets the fill pattern for the specified No.

File name GRCLoadFillPattern.c

99
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCLoadHtmlFileName

GRCLoadHtmlFileName.c
Outline Get HTML file name for specified ID

Syntax GFileName* GRCLoadHtmlFileName(

unsigned short usResourceID
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usResourceID : resource ID

Return value Specified resource HTML file name

Details Gets the HTML file name with the specified ID.

File name GRCLoadHtmlFileName.c

GRCLoadLanguageStr

GRCLoadLanguageStr.c
Outline Get specified locale language-identifying character strings resource

Syntax GTCHAR *GRCLoadLanguageStr(

unsigned short usLocaleID
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usLocaleID : locale ID

Return value Pointer to specified locale character string

Details Gets the pointer for the specified locale language-identifying chracter strings
resource.

File name GRCLoadLanguageStr.c

100
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCLoadNowLanguageStr

GRCLoadLanguageStr.c
Outline Get current locale language-identifying character strings resource

Syntax GTCHAR *GRCLoadNowLanguageStr()

Argument None

Return value Pointer to current locale character string

Details Gets the pointer for the current locale language-identifying chracter strings
resource.

File name GRCLoadLanguageStr.c

GRCLoadLinePattern

GRCLoadLinePattern.c
Outline Get line drawing pattern for specified No.

Syntax char *GRCLoadLinePattern(

unsigned short usIndex
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usIndex : line drawing No.

Return value Line drawing pattern for specified No.

Details Gets the pointer to the line drawing pattern for the specified No.

File name GRCLoadLinePattern.c

101
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCSetResourceHandle

GRCResourceHandle.c
Outline Set current resource handle

Syntax void GRCSetResourceHandle(

HGRESOURCE hResource
)

Argument (i) HGRESOURCE hResource : resource handle to be set

Return value None

Details Sets the current resource handle.

File name GRCResourceHandle.c

GRCGetResourceHandle

GRCResourceHandle.c
Outline Get current resource handle

Syntax HGRESOURCE GRCGetResourceHandle()

Argument None

Return value Current resource handle

Details Gets the pointer to the current resource handle.

File name GRCResourceHandle.c

102
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCUnicodeToMultiByte

GRCUnicode.c
Outline UNICODE → multibyte conversion

Syntax unsigned long GRCUnicodeToMultiByte(

GTCHAR *pszLangStr,
char *mbstr,
wchar_t *wcstr,
unsigned long ulCount
)

Argument (i) GTCHAR *pszLangStr : language-identifying character string

(o) char *mbstr : buffer for saving multibyte character string
(i) wchar_t *wcstr : buffer for saving unicode character string
(i) unsigned long ulCount : maximum size that can be stored in output
destination buffer

Return value Write size in output destination multibyte character string.

Details Converts a unicode character string to a multibyte character string.

When NULL is specified in mbstr, the size necessary for the output destination
buffer is returned to the return values.

File name GRCUnicode.c

103
3. GResource
3.2 Descriptions of GResource Functions

GRCMultiByteToUnicode

GRCUnicode.c
Outline multibyte → UNICODE conversion

Syntax unsigned long GRCMultiByteToUnicode(

GTCHAR *pszLangStr,
wchar_t *wcstr,
char *mbstr,
unsigned long ulCount
)

Argument (i) GTCHAR *pszLangStr : language-identifying character string

(o) wchar_t *wcstr : buffer storing the unicode character string
(i) char *mbstr : buffer storing the multibyte character string
(i) unsigned long ulCount : maximum size that can be stored in output
destination buffer

Return value Write size in output destination unicode character string.

Details Converts a multibyte character string to a unicode character string.

When NULL is specified in wcstr, the size necessary for the output
destination buffer is returned to the return values.

File name GRCUnicode.c

104
 4. GEvent
4.1 List of GEvent Functions

4. GEvent

This section describes the GEvent function group.

4.1 List of GEvent Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

1 GEInitEvent short GEvent.c Initialize event system
2 GEQuitEvent void GEvent.c Process event system
termination
3 GECreateEventMessage GEventMessag GEvent.c Define event structure
e
4 GESetEvent short GEvent.c Register event
5 GEGetEvent short GEvent.c Acquire event
6 GEClearTimerEvent void GEvent.c Clear timer event registration
from event queue
7 GESetTimer short GTimer.c Register timer event
8 GEKillTimer void GTimer.c Clear timer event registration
9 GECheckTimer void GTimer.c Confirm that timer event has been
issued
10 GESetSystemTime short GTimer.c Set system time
11 GEGetSystemTime short GTimer.c Get system time
12 GECompareSystemTime long GTimer.c System time comparison
13 GEClearTargetEvent void GEvent.c Clear registration for specified
objects event to be sent

105
 4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

4.2 Outline of GEvent Functions

GEInitEvent

GEvent.c
Outline Initialize event system

Syntax short GEInitEvent()

Argument None

Return value FALSE : initialization failed

TRUE : initialization succeeded

Details Initializes the event system.

File name GEvent.c

GEQuitEvent

GEvent.c
Outline Process event system termination

Syntax void GEQuitEvent()

Argument None

Return value None

Details Quits event system.

File name GEvent.c

106
4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

GECreateEventMessage

GEvent.c
Outline Define event structure

Syntax GEventMessage GECreateEventMessage(

unsigned short usMessage,
void *pvTarget,
long lLParam,
long lUParam
)

Argument (i)unsigned short usMessage : event message

(i)void *pvTarget : event target object
(i)long lLParam : lower-side of additional information
(i)long lUParam : upper-side of additional information

Return value Event structure

Details Defines event structure.

File name GEvent.c

107
4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

GESetEvent

GEvent.c
Outline Register event

Syntax short GESetEvent(

GEventMessage gemMsg,
short fMarge
)

Argument (i)GEventMessage gemMsg : Event information

(i)short fMarge : merge flag

Return value FALSE : registration failed

TRUE : registration succeeded

Details Registers an event.

When there is a same event for the merge flag, this makes the setting either for
merging or not for merging.
fMarge
FALSE : no merge
TRUE : merge

File name GEvent.c

108
4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

GEGetEvent

GEvent.c
Outline Acquire event

Syntax short GEGetEvent(

GEventMessage *gemMsg,
long lTimeOut
)

Argument (i)GEventMessage *gemMsg : event information

(i)long lTimeOut : timeout

Return value FALSE : no event

TRUE : event present

Details Gets an event.

When the event is not generated until the timeout time passes, the status is
changed to the waiting.

File name GEvent.c

GEClearTimerEvent

GEvent.c
Outline Clear timer event registration from even queue

Syntax void GEClearTimerEvent(

void *pvTarget,
unsigned short usTimerID
)

Argument (i) void * pvTarget : timer event target object

(i) unsigned short usTimerID : timer ID

Return value None

Details Clears the registration of the timer event for the ID specified from the event
queue.
Specify the object where the timer event is set in pvTarget.

File name GEvent.c

109
4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

GESetTimer

GTimer.c
Outline Register timer event

Syntax short GESetTimer(

void *pvTarget,
unsigned short usTimerID,
unsigned long ulTimeOut
)

Argument (i)void *pvTarget : timer event target object

(i)unsigned short usTimerID : timer ID
(i)unsigned long ulTimeOut : timer interval

Return value FALSE : timer event registration failed

TRUE : timer event registration succeeded

Details Registers a timer event.

File name GTimer.c

GEKillTimer

GTimer.c
Outline Clear timer event registration

Syntax void GEKillTimer(

void *pvTarget,
unsigned short usTimerID
)

Argument (i)void *pvTarget : timer event target object

(i)unsigned short usTimerID : timer ID to be cleared

Return value None

Details Clears the timer event registration.

File name GTimer.c

110
4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

GECheckTimer

GTimer.c
Outline Confirm that timer event has been issued

Syntax void GECheckTimer()

Argument None

Return value None

Details Checks the issuance of a timer event.

If the timer event being issued is present, the event is registered.

File name GTimer.c

GESetSystemTime

GTimer.c
Outline Set system time

Syntax short GESetSystemTime(

GSystemTime *pSystemTime
)

Argument GSystemTime *pSystemTime : system time

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the current system time.

File name GTimer.c

111
4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

GEGetSystemTime

GTimer.c
Outline Get system time

Syntax short GEGetSystemTime(

GSystemTime *pSystemTime
)

Argument GSystemTime *pSystemTime : for system time storage

Return value FALSE : acquisition failed

TRUE : acquisition succeeded

Details Gets the current system time.

File name GTimer.c

GECompareSystemTime

GTimer.c
Outline System time comparison

Syntax long GECompareSystemTime(

GSystemTime *pSystemTime1,
GSystemTime *pSystemTime2
)

Argument GSystemTime *pSystemTime1 : system time

GSystemTime *pSystemTime2 : system time

Return value Difference in system times

Details Compares the two times.

File name GTimer.c

112
4. GEvent
4.2 Description of GEvent Functions

GEClearTargetEvent

GEvent.c
Outline Clear specified target event registration

Syntax void GEClearTargetEvent(

void * pvTarget
)

Argument (i) void * pvTarget : target object

Return value None

Details Clears the target event registration set specified in pvTarget.

File name GEvent.c

113
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

5. GCS

This section describes the GCS function group.

5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

1 GCSGetType unsigned short gwin.h Get object type
2 GCSGetID unsigned short gwin.h Get object ID
3 GCSGetXPosition short gwin.h Get horizontal position
4 GCSGetYPosition short gwin.h Get vertical position
5 GCSSetPosition void gwin.h Set position
6 GCSGetPosition void gwin.h Get position
7 GCSGetWidth short gwin.h Get width
8 GCSGetHeight short gwin.h Get height
9 GCSGetSize void gwin.h Get size
10 GCSSetBounds void gwin.h Set relative position within
parent object
11 GCSGetBounds void gwin.h Get relative position within
parent object
12 GCSCalcClientRect void gwin.h Get coordinate position of
client area
13 GCSGetClientRect void gwin.h Get object client area
14 GCSClientToScreen void gwin.h Convert client coordinates to
screen coordinates
15 GCSGetStyle unsigned long gwin.h Batch style acquisition
16 GCSSetVisibleStatus void gwin.h Set display/non-display status
17 GCSGetVisibleStatus short gwin.h Get display/non-display status
18 GCSSetEnableStatus void gwin.h Set controllable or
uncontrollable status
19 GCSGetEnableStatus short gwin.h Get controllable or
uncontrollable status
20 GCSSetConsumableStatus void gwin.h Set input event consumable or
input event not consumable
status
21 GCSGetConsumableStatus short gwin.h Get input event consumable or
input event not consumable
status
22 GCSSetCaptionStatus void gwin.h Set caption display status
23 GCSGetCaptionStatus short gwin.h Get caption display status
24 GCSSetFocusStatus void gwin.h Set focus status
25 GCSGetFocusStatus short gwin.h Get focus status

114
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

26 GCSSetPanelStatus void gwin.h Set management panel object
status
27 GCSGetPanelStatus short gwin.h Get management panel object
status
28 GCSSetStyleStatus void gwin.h Set style
29 GCSGetStyleStatus short gwin.h Get style
30 GCSSetParent void gwin.h Set parent object
31 GCSGetParent GBaseObject* gwin.h Get parent object
32 GCSImportProperty short gwin.h Import property settings
33 GCSExportProperty void gwin.h Export property settings
34 GCSCreate short gwin.h Create process
35 GCSCreateVram short gwin.h Create process (create VRAM)
36 GCSDelete void gwin.h Delete process
37 GCSPaint void gwin.h Drawing process
38 GCSOnDraw void gwin.h Client area drawing process
39 GCSOnNcDraw void gwin.h Non-client area drawing
process
40 GCSAddRefreshRect void gwin.h Client area redraw area
registration
41 GCSLButtonPress long gwin.h Process for pressing left
mouse button
42 GCSOnLButtonPress long gwin.h Client area process for
pressing left mouse button
43 GCSOnNcLButtonPress long gwin.h Non-client area process for
pressing left mouse button
44 GCSLButtonRelease void gwin.h Process for releasing left
mouse button
45 GCSOnLButtonRelease void gwin.h Client area process for
releasing left mouse button
46 GCSOnNcLButtonRelease void gwin.h Non-client area process for
releasing left mouse button
47 GCSMouseMove void gwin.h Pointing device movement
process
48 GCSOnMouseMove void gwin.h Pointing device client area
movement process
49 GCSOnNcMouseMove void gwin.h Pointing device non-client area
movement process
50 GCSKeyPress long gwin.h Process for pressing key
51 GCSKeyRelease void gwin.h Process for releasing key
52 GCSSetFocus void gwin.h Focus setting process
53 GCSKillFocus void gwin.h Focus removing process

115
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

54 GCSTimer void gwin.h Timer process
55 GCSUser long gwin.h User process
56 GCSSetFocusInformation void gwin.h Set focus movement
information
57 GCSGetFocusInformation GFocusInform gwin.h Get focus movement
ation * information
58 GCSChar void gwin.h Character input process
59 GCSClose void gwin.h Issue object close process
request
60 GCSDeleteChild void gwin.h Child object deletion process
61 GCSSetMemorySpace void gwin.h Set memory information
62 GCSGetMemorySpace void gwin.h Get memory information
63 GCSSetDrawForceStatus void gwin.h Set forced drawing status
64 GCSGetDrawForceStatus short gwin.h Get forced drawing status
65 GCSSetRedrawStatus void gwin.h Set redraw status
66 GCSGetRedrawStatus short gwin.h Get redraw status
67 GCSClearDrawStatus void gwin.h Clear drawing status
68 GCSAddDirtyRect void gwin.h Client area redraw area
registration (internal
processing function)
69 GCSSetPrevTimerObject void gwin.h Set previous object on timer
bidirectional list
70 GCSGetPrevTimerObject GBaseObject* gwin.h Get previous object on timer
bidirectional list
71 GCSSetNextTimerObject void gwin.h Set next object on timer
bidirectional list
72 GCSGetNextTimerObject GBaseObject* gwin.h Get next object on timer
bidirectional list
73 GCSSetBlinkStatus void gwin.h Set blink status
74 GCSGetBlinkStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get blink status
75 GCSGetParentPanel void gwin.h Get management panel object
76 GCSSetPrevBlinkControl void gwin.h Set previous object on blink
bidirectional list
77 GCSGetPrevBlinkControl GBaseObject* gwin.h Get previous object on blink
bidirectional list
78 GCSSetNextBlinkControl void gwin.h Set next object on blink
bidirectional list
79 GCSGetNextBlinkControl GBaseObject* gwin.h Get next object on blink
bidirectional list

116
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

80 GCSSetPrevScrollControl void gwin.h Set previous object on scroll
bidirectional list
81 GCSGetPrevScrollControl GBaseObject* gwin.h Get previous object on scroll
bidirectional list
82 GCSSetNextScrollControl void gwin.h Set next object on scroll
bidirectional list
83 GCSGetNextScrollControl GBaseObject* gwin.h Get next object on scroll
bidirectional list
84 GCSLoadData int gwin.h Load interpreter screen file
85 GCSSetHWDCEnvironment void gwin.h Set drawing environment
86 GCSGetScreen GBaseObject* gwin.h Get screen object
87 GCSSetGBaseObject void gwin.h Set object management
structure
88 GCSGetGBaseObject GBaseObject* gwin.h Get object management
structure
89 GCSFreeLoadData int gwin.h Release memory acquired by
LoadData
90 GCSSetModalStatus void gwin.h Set modal status
91 GCSGetModalStatus short gwin.h Get modal window status
92 GCSGetRetValue short gwin.h Get modal window return value
93 GCSBeginModal void gwin.h Start process for modal window
94 GCSEndModal void gwin.h End process for modal window
95 GCSSetTitleBarStatus void gwin.h Set title bar present/none
status
96 GCSGetTitleBarStatus short gwin.h Get title bar present/none
status
97 GCSSetCloseButtonStatus void gwin.h Set close button present/none
status
98 GCSGetCloseButtonStatus short gwin.h Get close button present/none
status
99 GCSSetEdgeStatus void gwin.h Set window frame
present/none status
100 GCSGetEdgeStatus short gwin.h Get window frame
present/none status
101 GCSAddChild short gwin.h Add child object
102 GCSGetChildList HGBWL gwin.h Get child object list
103 GCSSetBackGroundDesign void gwin.h Set background design
104 GCSGetBackGroundDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get background design
105 GCSCreateChildren short gwin.h Process for creating child
object
106 GCSDeleteAllChildren void gwin.h Delete all child objects
107 GCSGetChild GBaseObject * gwin.h Search child object

117
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

108 GCSGetChildAll GBaseObject * gwin.h Search child object search in
frame
109 GCSSetActiveChild short gwin.h Set active object
110 GCSGetActiveChild GBaseObject* gwin.h Get active object (only direct
child object)
111 GCSGetActiveControl GBaseObject* gwin.h Get active control (including
terminal child objects)
112 GCSSetBlinkOffInterval void gwin.h Set blinking OFF interval
113 GCSGetBlinkOffInterval long gwin.h Get blinking OFF interval
114 GCSSetBlinkOnInterval void gwin.h Set blinking ON interval
115 GCSGetBlinkOnInterval long gwin.h Get blinking ON interval
116 GCSAddBlinkControl void gwin.h Add caption blink control
117 GCSRemoveBlinkControl void gwin.h Delete caption blink control
118 GCSAddScrollControl void gwin.h Add caption scroll control
119 GCSRemoveScrollControl void gwin.h Delete caption scroll control
120 GCSDrawChildren void gwin.h Child object drawing process
121 GCSAttachPanel GBaseObject * gwin.h Attach panel object
122 GCSGetPanel GBaseObject * gwin.h Get attached GCPanel object
123 GCSSetSystemFontID void gwin.h Set system font resource ID
124 GCSGetSystemFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get system font resource ID
125 GCSSetSystemBorderID void gwin.h Set system 3D border resource
ID
126 GCSGetSystemBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get system 3D border resource
ID
127 GCSSetSystemForeColor void gwin.h Set system foreground color
128 GCSGetSystemForeColor GColor gwin.h Get system foreground color
129 GCSSetSystemBackColor void gwin.h Set system background color
130 GCSGetSystemBackColor GColor gwin.h Get system background color
131 GCSSetSystemActiveColor void gwin.h Set system active color
132 GCSGetSystemActiveColor GColor gwin.h Get system active color
133 GCSSetSystemInactiveColor void gwin.h Set system inactive color
134 GCSGetSystemInactiveColor GColor gwin.h Get system inactive color
135 GCSGetFrame GBaseObject * gwin.h Get frame
136 GCSAddWindow short gwin.h Add window
137 GCSChangeFocus void gwin.h Change focus
138 GCSGetFocus GBaseObject * gwin.h Get focus
139 GCSDispatchMessage long gwin.h Event dispatch process
140 GCSGetWDC HWDC gwin.h Get drawing context
141 GCSGetHWDC HWDC gwin.h Get drawing context
142 GCSSetPanelPlane void gwin.h Set memory area panel plane
management information

118
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

143 GCSGetPanelPlane unsigned char gwin.h Get memory area panel plane
management information
144 GCSSetWindowPlane void gwin.h Set memory area window
plane management information
145 GCSGetWindowPlane unsigned char gwin.h Get memory area window
plane management information
146 GCSSetExitStatus void gwin.h Set exit information
147 GCSGetExitStatus short gwin.h Get exit information
148 GCSSetSystemStatus void gwin.h Set system information
149 GCSGetSystemStatus short gwin.h Get system information
150 GCSDoModal short gwin.h Window modal display
151 GCSSetPaletteStatus void gwin.h Set system palette utilization
status
152 GCSGetPaletteStatus short gwin.h Get system palette utilization
status
153 GCSSetSystemPaletteID void gwin.h Set system palette resource ID
154 GCSGetSystemPaletteID unsigned short gwin.h Get system palette resource ID
155 GCSSetPaletteColors void gwin.h Set number of colors in system
palette
156 GCSGetPaletteColors unsigned short gwin.h Get number of colors in system
palette
157 GCSAddTimerObject void gwin.h Add object to system timer list
158 GCSRemoveTimerObject void gwin.h Delete object from system
timer list
159 GCSGetWindow GBaseObject* gwin.h Get window
160 GCSGetActiveWindow GBaseObject* gwin.h Get active window
161 GCSShowPanel short gwin.h Display panel switching
process
162 GCSCreateInstance GBaseObject * gwin.h Create instance process
163 GCSPageLogOperation short gwin.h Switch screen according to
screen history
164 GCSDrawFrame void gwin.h Related panel drawing process
165 GCSDrawPanel void gwin.h Related GCPanel object
drawing process
166 GCSOnDrawWindow void gwin.h Window drawing process
167 GCSSetSystemPalette void gwin.h Set system palette
168 GCSDrawBackGround void gwin.h Background drawing process
169 GCSCreateGWindow short gwin.h Create window
170 GCSSetScreenManager void gwin.h Set screen manager
171 GCSSetModuleID void gwin.h Set module ID
172 GCSClearPageLog void gwin.h Clear screen history
173 GCSAddPageLog short gwin.h Add screen history

119
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

174 GCSPrevPage short gwin.h Issue request for displaying
previous screen
175 GCSNextPage short gwin.h Issue request for displaying
next screen
176 GCSSetPageOffset void gwin.h Set module page offset
177 GCSGetPageOffset long gwin.h Get module page offset
178 GCSGetOperationLog short gwin.h Get operation log
179 GCSClearOperationLog short gwin.h Clear operation log
180 GCSAddOperationLog short gwin.h Add operation log (operation
event)
181 GCSAddChangePageLog short gwin.h Add operation log (screen
switching)
182 GCSGetPageNumber long gwin.h Get screen No.
183 GCSLoadProjectFile int gwin.h Load interpreter project file
184 GCSLoadGWindow GBaseObject* gwin.h Window loading process
185 GCSModalGWindow short gwin.h Modal window process
186 GCSSetBlinkType void gwin.h Set blink type
187 GCSGetBlinkType unsigned char gwin.h Get blink type
188 GCSSetBlinkEnableStatus void gwin.h Set blink operation
189 GCSGetBlinkEnableStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get blink operation
190 GCSStartCaptionBlink void gwin.h Start blink operation
191 GCSStopCaptionBlink void gwin.h Stop blink operation
192 GCSSetCaptionScrollEnable void gwin.h Set scroll operation
193 GCSGetCaptionScrollEnable unsigned char gwin.h Get scroll operation
194 GCSStartCaptionScroll void gwin.h Start scroll operation
195 GCSStopCaptionScroll void gwin.h Stop scroll operation
196 GCSPauseCaptionScroll void gwin.h Pause scroll operation
197 GCSRestartCaptionScroll void gwin.h Restart scroll operation
198 GCSSetCaptionScrollStatus void gwin.h Set scroll operation status
199 GCSGetCaptionScrollStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get scroll operation status
200 GCSIsCaptionOutOfBounds short gwin.h Confirm overflowing of caption
character string
201 GCSSetCaptionScrollDelayTime void gwin.h Set scroll delay time
202 GCSGetCaptionScrollDelayTime unsigned long gwin.h Get scroll delay time
203 GCSSetCaptionScrollRefreshTime void gwin.h Set scroll refresh time
204 GCSGetCaptionScrollRefreshTime unsigned long gwin.h Get scroll refresh time
205 GCSSetCaptionScrollMovementValue void gwin.h Set scroll movement value
206 GCSGetCaptionScrollMovementValue unsigned short gwin.h Get scroll movement value
207 GCSSetCaptionScrollStartPosition void gwin.h Set scroll start position
208 GCSGetCaptionScrollStartPosition unsigned char gwin.h Get scroll start position
209 GCSSetCaptionScrollPosition void gwin.h Set total scroll movement value

120
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

210 GCSGetCaptionScrollPosition long gwin.h Get total scroll movement
value
211 GCSUpdateScroll void gwin.h Scroll update process
212 GCSIsCaptionScrollFinish short gwin.h Confirm caption scroll
completion
213 GCSCallBackMessage long gwin.h Call back message execution
process
214 GCSLoadScreenFile int gwin.h Load interpreter screen file
215 GCSSetPenColor void gwin.h Set line color
216 GCSGetPenColor GColor gwin.h Get line color
217 GCSSetPenDash void gwin.h Set line type
218 GCSGetPenDash unsigned short gwin.h Get line type
219 GCSSetPenSize void gwin.h Set line width
220 GCSGetPenSize unsigned short gwin.h Get line width
221 GCSSetAngle void gwin.h Set start angle and finish angle
for sector and arc
222 GCSGetAngle void gwin.h Get start angle and finish angle
for sector and arc
223 GCSSetBrush void gwin.h Set fill brush
224 GCSGetBrush GBrush* gwin.h Get fill brush
225 GCSSetStartPoint void gwin.h Set line drawing starting point
226 GCSGetStartPoint void gwin.h Get line drawing starting point
227 GCSSetEndPoint void gwin.h Set line drawing end point
228 GCSGetEndPoint void gwin.h Get line drawing end point
229 GCSSetPoly short gwin.h Set polygon/continuous line
230 GCSGetPoly GPoly* gwin.h Get polygon/continuous line
231 GCSSetDrawAttribute void gwin.h Set drawing attributes for figure
232 GCSButtonSetAction void gwin.h Set button operations
233 GCSButtonGetAction unsigned char gwin.h Get button operations
234 GCSButtonSetDisplay void gwin.h Set button display
235 GCSButtonGetDisplay unsigned char gwin.h Get button display
236 GCSButtonSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
237 GCSButtonGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
238 GCSButtonSetOnDesign void gwin.h Set ON status design
239 GCSButtonGetOnDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get ON status design
240 GCSButtonSetOffDesign void gwin.h Set OFF status design
241 GCSButtonGetOffDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get OFF status design
242 GCSButtonSetFocusDesign void gwin.h Set FOCUS status design
243 GCSButtonGetFocusDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get FOCUS status design
244 GCSButtonSetDisableDesign void gwin.h Set Disable status design
245 GCSButtonGetDisableDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get Disable status design
246 GCSButtonSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID

121
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

247 GCSButtonGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
248 GCSButtonSetStringID void gwin.h Set caption character string
resource ID
249 GCSButtonGetStringID unsigned short gwin.h Get caption character string
resource ID
250 GCSButtonSetCaption void gwin.h Set caption information
251 GCSButtonGetCaption GCaption * gwin.h Get caption information
252 GCSButtonSetFocusEffect void gwin.h Set effect during focus
253 GCSButtonGetFocusEffect unsigned char gwin.h Get effect during focus
254 GCSButtonSetStatus void gwin.h Set object status
255 GCSButtonGetStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get object status
256 GCSCheckboxSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
257 GCSCheckboxGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
258 GCSCheckboxSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
259 GCSCheckboxGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
260 GCSCheckboxSetStringID void gwin.h Set caption character string
resource ID
261 GCSCheckboxGetStringID unsigned short gwin.h Get caption character string
resource ID
262 GCSCheckboxSetCaption void gwin.h Set caption information
263 GCSCheckboxGetCaption GCaption * gwin.h Get caption information
264 GCSCheckboxSetFocusEffect void gwin.h Set effect during focus
265 GCSCheckboxGetFocusEffect unsigned char gwin.h Get effect during focus
266 GCSCheckboxSetStatus void gwin.h Set object status
267 GCSCheckboxGetStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get object status
268 GCSCheckboxSetBoxSize void gwin.h Set box size
269 GCSCheckboxGetBoxSize unsigned short gwin.h Get box size
270 GCSCheckboxSetBoxColor void gwin.h Set box color
271 GCSCheckboxGetBoxColor GColor gwin.h Get box color
272 GCSCheckboxSetFocusColor void gwin.h Set background color during
focus
273 GCSCheckboxGetFocusColor GColor gwin.h Get background color during
focus
274 GCSCheckboxSetDisableCaptionColor void gwin.h Set character color when
disabled
275 GCSCheckboxGetDisableCaptionColor GColor gwin.h Get character color when
disabled
276 GCSCheckboxSetDisableBoxColor void gwin.h Set box color when disabled
277 GCSCheckboxGetDisableBoxColor GColor gwin.h Get box color when disabled
278 GCSEditSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
279 GCSEditGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID

122
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

280 GCSEditSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
281 GCSEditGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
282 GCSEditAddString short gwin.h Add character string
283 GCSEditSetString short gwin.h Set display character string
284 GCSEditGetString short gwin.h Get display character string
285 GCSEditSetTextColor void gwin.h Set character display color
286 GCSEditGetTextColor GColor gwin.h Get character display color
287 GCSEditSetBackColor void gwin.h Set background color
288 GCSEditGetBackColor GColor gwin.h Get background color
289 GCSEditSetBrush void gwin.h Set brush
290 GCSEditDeleteString void gwin.h Delete character string
291 GCSEditAddLine short gwin.h Add line
292 GCSEditInsertLine short gwin.h Insert line
293 GCSEditDeleteLine short gwin.h Delete line
294 GCSEditGetLineString short gwin.h Get line character string
295 GCSEditSetLineFeedCode void gwin.h Set line feed character string
296 GCSEditGetLineFeedCode unsigned char gwin.h Get line feed character string
297 GCSEditSetCursor short gwin.h Set cursor position
298 GCSEditGetCursor short gwin.h Get cursor position
299 GCSEditSetForeColor void gwin.h Set foreground color
300 GCSEditGetForeColor GColor gwin.h Get foreground color
301 GCSEditSetFillPattern void gwin.h Set fill pattern
302 GCSEditGetFillPattern short gwin.h Get fill pattern
303 GCSEditSetInsertMode void gwin.h Set insert/overwrite mode
304 GCSEditGetInsertMode short gwin.h Get insert/overwrite mode
305 GCSEditSetLineBrush short gwin.h Set line brush
306 GCSEditGetLineBrush short gwin.h Get line brush
307 GCSEditSetLineTextColor short gwin.h Set line text display color
308 GCSEditGetLineTextColor GColor gwin.h Get line text display color
309 GCSEditGetLength unsigned long gwin.h Get character length
310 GCSEditFind short gwin.h Search forward
311 GCSEditReverseFind short gwin.h Search backward
312 GCSEditReplace short gwin.h Replace
313 GCSEditReplaceAll unsigned long gwin.h Replace all
314 GCSEditInsertString short gwin.h Insert character string
315 GCSEditGetLineCount unsigned long gwin.h Get number of lines
316 GCSEditGetBrush short gwin.h Get brush
317 GCSEditRemoveString short gwin.h Delete character string
318 GCSHtmlbrowserSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
319 GCSHtmlbrowserGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID

123
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

320 GCSHtmlbrowserSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
321 GCSHtmlbrowserGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
322 GCSHtmlbrowserSetScrollBarWidth void gwin.h Set scroll bar width
323 GCSHtmlbrowserGetScrollBarWidth unsigned char gwin.h Get scroll bar width
324 GCSHtmlbrowserSetTextColor void gwin.h Set text display color
325 GCSHtmlbrowserGetTextColor GColor gwin.h Get text display color
326 GCSHtmlbrowserSetBackColor void gwin.h Set background color
327 GCSHtmlbrowserGetBackColor GColor gwin.h Get background color
328 GCSHtmlbrowserSetLinkColor void gwin.h Set link color
329 GCSHtmlbrowserGetLinkColor GColor gwin.h Get link color
330 GCSHtmlbrowserSetHtmlFileName void gwin.h Set HTML file name
331 GCSHtmlbrowserGetHtmlFileName GTCHAR* gwin.h Get HTML file name
332 GCSLabelSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
333 GCSLabelGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
334 GCSLabelSetStringID void gwin.h Set caption character string
resource ID
335 GCSLabelGetStringID unsigned short gwin.h Get caption character string
resource ID
336 GCSLabelSetCaption void gwin.h Set caption information
337 GCSLabelGetCaption GCaption * gwin.h Get caption information
338 GCSListSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
339 GCSListGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
340 GCSListSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
341 GCSListGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
342 GCSListSetCaption void gwin.h Set caption information
343 GCSListGetCaption GCaption * gwin.h Get caption information
344 GCSListSetFocusColor void gwin.h Set background color during
focus
345 GCSListGetFocusColor GColor gwin.h Get background color during
focus
346 GCSListSetScrollButtonColor void gwin.h Set scroll button color
347 GCSListGetScrollButtonColor GColor gwin.h Get scroll button color
348 GCSListSetScrollBarColor void gwin.h Set scroll bar color
349 GCSListGetScrollBarColor GColor gwin.h Get scroll bar color
350 GCSListSetNormalColor void gwin.h Set normal background color
351 GCSListGetNormalColor GColor gwin.h Get normal background color
352 GCSListSetDisableColor void gwin.h Set background color when
disabled
353 GCSListGetDisableColor GColor gwin.h Get background color when
disabled

124
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

354 GCSListSetScrollBarWidth void gwin.h Set scroll bar width
355 GCSListGetScrollBarWidth unsigned char gwin.h Get scroll bar width
356 GCSListSetSelectBarColor void gwin.h Set selection bar color
357 GCSListGetSelectBarColor GColor gwin.h Get selection bar color
358 GCSListSetMaxListLines void gwin.h Set maximum number of lines
in list
359 GCSListGetMaxListLines unsigned short gwin.h Get maximum number of lines
in list
360 GCSListAddString short gwin.h Add list character string
361 GCSListGetListString short gwin.h Get list character string
362 GCSListRemoveAllStrings void gwin.h Delete all list character strings
363 GCSListSetCurrentSelect short gwin.h Set selected line
364 GCSListGetCurrentSelect long gwin.h Get selected line
365 GCSListSetVisibleScrollBarStatus void gwin.h Set scroll bar
display/non-display status
366 GCSListGetVisibleScrollBarStatus short gwin.h Get scroll bar
display/non-display status
367 GCSListSetEnableScrollBarStatus void gwin.h Set scroll bar controllable or
uncontrollable status
368 GCSListGetEnableScrollBarStatus short gwin.h Get scroll bar controllable or
uncontrollable status
369 GCSListSetTopLine void gwin.h Set list top line
370 GCSListGetTopLine long gwin.h Get list top line
371 GCSListInsertString short gwin.h Insert list character string
372 GCSListGetLineCount short gwin.h Get number of lines in list
373 GCSListRemoveString short gwin.h Delete list character string
374 GCSProgressbarSetBackGroundDesign void gwin.h Set background design
375 GCSProgressbarGetBackGroundDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get background design
376 GCSProgressbarSetBarDesign void gwin.h Set bar design
377 GCSProgressbarGetBarDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get bar design
378 GCSProgressbarSetRange void gwin.h Set progress bar range
379 GCSProgressbarGetRange void gwin.h Get progress bar range
380 GCSProgressbarSetDirection void gwin.h Set fill direction
381 GCSProgressbarGetDirection unsigned char gwin.h Get fill direction
382 GCSProgressbarGetValue short gwin.h Get current progress bar value
383 GCSProgressbarSetValue void gwin.h Set current progress bar value
384 GCSRadiobuttonSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
385 GCSRadiobuttonGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
386 GCSRadiobuttonSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
387 GCSRadiobuttonGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID

125
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

388 GCSRadiobuttonSetStringID void gwin.h Set caption character string
resource ID
389 GCSRadiobuttonGetStringID unsigned short gwin.h Get caption character string
resource ID
390 GCSRadiobuttonSetCaption void gwin.h Set caption information
391 GCSRadiobuttonGetCaption GCaption * gwin.h Get caption information
392 GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusEffect void gwin.h Set effect during focus
393 GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusEffect unsigned char gwin.h Get effect during focus
394 GCSRadiobuttonSetStatus void gwin.h Set object status
395 GCSRadiobuttonGetStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get object status
396 GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxSize void gwin.h Set box size
397 GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxSize unsigned short gwin.h Get box size
398 GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxColor void gwin.h Set box color
399 GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxColor GColor gwin.h Get box color
400 GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusColor void gwin.h Set background color during
focus
401 GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusColor GColor gwin.h Get background color during
focus
402 GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableCaptionColor void gwin.h Set character color when
disable
403 GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableCaptionColor GColor gwin.h Get character color when
disable
404 GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableBoxColor void gwin.h Set box color when disable
405 GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableBoxColor GColor gwin.h Get box color when disable
406 GCSRadiobuttonSetRadioGroup void gwin.h Set radio group No.
407 GCSRadiobuttonGetRadioGroup unsigned short gwin.h Get radio group No.
408 GCSScrollbarexSetDisplay void gwin.h Set display type
409 GCSScrollbarexGetDisplay unsigned char gwin.h Get display type
410 GCSScrollbarexSetDirection void gwin.h Set scroll bar direction
411 GCSScrollbarexGetDirection unsigned char gwin.h Get scroll bar direction
412 GCSScrollbarexSetPageSize void gwin.h Set page size
413 GCSScrollbarexGetPageSize unsigned long gwin.h Get page size
414 GCSScrollbarexSetRange void gwin.h Set scroll bar range
415 GCSScrollbarexGetRange void gwin.h Get scroll bar range
416 GCSScrollbarexSetScrollArrowColor void gwin.h Set scroll arrow color
417 GCSScrollbarexGetScrollArrowColor GColor gwin.h Get scroll arrow color
418 GCSScrollbarexSetScrollPosition void gwin.h Set scroll bar current position
419 GCSScrollbarexGetScrollPosition long gwin.h Get scroll bar current position
420 GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOnImgID void gwin.h Set design (upper) resource ID
when button is ON
421 GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOffImgID void gwin.h Set design (upper) resource ID
when button is OFF

126
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

422 GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOnImgID unsigned short gwin.h Get design (upper) resource ID
when button is ON
423 GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOffImgID unsigned short gwin.h Get design (upper) resource ID
when button is OFF
424 GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOnImgID void gwin.h Set design (lower) resource ID
when button is ON
425 GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOffImgID void gwin.h Set design (lower) resource ID
when button is OFF
426 GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOnImgID unsigned short gwin.h Get design (lower) resource ID
when button is ON
427 GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOffImgID unsigned short gwin.h Get design (lower) resource ID
when button is OFF
428 GCSScrollbarexSetBackGroundColor void gwin.h Set background color
429 GCSScrollbarexGetBackGroundColor GColor gwin.h Get background color
430 GCSScrollbarexSetOutLineBorderID void gwin.h Set outline 3D border
431 GCSScrollbarexGetOutLineBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get outline 3D border
432 GCSScrollbarexSetPinchWidth void gwin.h Set pinch width
433 GCSScrollbarexGetPinchWidth unsigned short gwin.h Get pinch width
434 GCSScrollbarexSetPinchColor void gwin.h Set pinch color
435 GCSScrollbarexGetPinchColor GColor gwin.h Get pinch color
436 GCSScrollbarexSetBarEnableStatus void gwin.h Set bar display/non-display
437 GCSScrollbarexGetBarEnableStatus short gwin.h Get bar display/non-display
438 GCSTextboxSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
439 GCSTextboxGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
440 GCSTextboxSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
441 GCSTextboxGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
442 GCSTextboxSetCaption void gwin.h Set caption information
443 GCSTextboxGetCaption GCaption * gwin.h Get caption information
444 GCSTextboxSetFocusEffect void gwin.h Set effect during focus
445 GCSTextboxGetFocusEffect unsigned char gwin.h Get effect during focus
446 GCSTextboxSetFocusColor void gwin.h Set background color during
focus
447 GCSTextboxGetFocusColor GColor gwin.h Get background color during
focus
448 GCSTextboxSetNormalColor void gwin.h Set normal background color
449 GCSTextboxGetNormalColor GColor gwin.h Get normal background color
450 GCSTextboxSetDisableColor void gwin.h Set background color when
disabled
451 GCSTextboxGetDisableColor GColor gwin.h Get background color when
disabled
452 GCSTextboxSetTextType void gwin.h Set character string type
453 GCSTextboxGetTextType unsigned char gwin.h Get character string type

127
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

454 GCSTextboxSetFormatID void gwin.h Set character string display
format resource ID
455 GCSTextboxGetFormatID unsigned gwin.h Get character string display
short format resource ID
456 GCSTextboxSetPasswordStatus void gwin.h Set password display status
457 GCSTextboxGetPasswordStatus short gwin.h Get password display status
458 GCSTextboxSetCommaStatus void gwin.h Set comma display status
459 GCSTextboxGetCommaStatus short gwin.h Get comma display status
460 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputNumberStatus void gwin.h Set no number input status
461 GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputNumberStatus short gwin.h Get no number input status
462 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus void gwin.h Set one-byte lower case
character input disabled status
463 GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus short gwin.h Get one-byte lower case
character input disabled status
464 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus void gwin.h Set one-byte upper case
character input disabled status
465 GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus short gwin.h Ge one-byte upper case
character input disabled status
466 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus void gwin.h Set one-byte symbol input
disabled status
467 GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus short gwin.h Get one-byte symbol input
disabled status
468 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus void gwin.h Set two-byte character input
disabled status
469 GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus short gwin.h Get two-byte character input
disabled status
470 GCSTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus void gwin.h Set maximum value check
status
471 GCSTextboxGetCheckMaxStatus short gwin.h Get maximum value check
status
472 GCSTextboxSetCheckMinStatus void gwin.h Set minimum value check
status
473 GCSTextboxGetCheckMinStatus short gwin.h Get minimum value check
status
474 GCSTextboxSetMaxGValue void gwin.h Set maximum value
475 GCSTextboxGetMaxGValue GValue gwin.h Get maximum value
476 GCSTextboxSetMinGValue void gwin.h Set minimum value
477 GCSTextboxGetMinGValue GValue gwin.h Get minimum value
478 GCSTextboxSetString short gwin.h Set display character string
479 GCSTextboxGetString short gwin.h Get display character string

128
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

480 GCSTextboxSetGValue short gwin.h Set display value
481 GCSTextboxGetGValue short gwin.h Get display value
482 GCSTextboxSetStringBuffer short gwin.h Set display buffer
483 GCSTextboxGetStringBuffer GTCHAR* gwin.h Get display buffer
484 GCSTextboxSetBackGroundPattern void gwin.h Set background fill status
485 GCSTextboxGetBackGroundPattern short gwin.h Get background fill status
486 GCSBWLInit void gwin.h Initialization
487 GCSBWLAdd short gwin.h Addition
488 GCSBWLRemove short gwin.h Deletion
489 GCSBWLClear void gwin.h All clear
490 GCSBWLMoveFirst short gwin.h Move to first
491 GCSBWLMoveLast short gwin.h Move to last
492 GCSBWLGetFirst GBaseObject* gwin.h Get first object
493 GCSBWLGetLast GBaseObject* gwin.h Get last object
494 GCSBWLFindListItem short gwin.h Find object
495 GCSBWLFindFirstItem short gwin.h Move search position to first
item
496 GCSBWLFindNextItem short gwin.h Acquire object at search
position and move search
position to next
497 GCSBWLFindLastItem short gwin.h Move search position to last
item
498 GCSBWLFindPrevItem short gwin.h Acquire object at search
position and move search
position to previous
499 GCSBWLCount long gwin.h Get number of list items
500 GCSBWLSetItemPosition void gwin.h Set current list search position
501 GCSBWLGetItemPosition void* gwin.h Get current list search position
502 GCSBWLNew HGBWL gwin.h Create list object
503 GCSBWLDelete void gwin.h Delete list object
504 GCSWDCGetHGDRAW HGDRAW gwin.h Get drawing handle
505 GCSWDCOffsetOrigin void gwin.h Move position of origin
506 GCSWDCSetClipRect void gwin.h Define clipping area
507 GCSWDCGetClipRect void gwin.h Get clipping area
508 GCSWDCInceptClipRect short gwin.h Define clipping for the part
overlapping the current clipping
area
509 GCSWDCBeginDraw void gwin.h Start drawing process
510 GCSWDCEndDraw void gwin.h End drawing process
511 GCSWDCNew HWDC gwin.h Create device context
512 GCSWDCDelete void gwin.h Create device context
513 GCSWDCSetOrigin void gwin.h Set position of origin

129
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

514 GCSPictureSetDisplay void gwin.h Set picture display
515 GCSPictureGetDisplay unsigned char gwin.h Get picture display
516 GCSPictureSetBorderID void gwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
517 GCSPictureGetBorderID unsigned short gwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
518 GCSPictureSetFontID void gwin.h Set font resource ID
519 GCSPictureGetFontID unsigned short gwin.h Get font resource ID
520 GCSPictureSetStringID void gwin.h Set caption character string
resource ID
521 GCSPictureGetStringID unsigned short gwin.h Get caption character string
resource ID
522 GCSPictureSetCaption void gwin.h Set caption information
523 GCSPictureGetCaption GCaption* gwin.h Get caption information
524 GCSPictureSetStatus void gwin.h Set object status
525 GCSPictureGetStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get object status
526 GCSPictureSetMaxStatus void gwin.h Set maximus picture status
527 GCSPictureGetMaxStatus unsigned char gwin.h Get maximus picture status
528 GCSPictureSetStatusDesign void gwin.h Set picture status design
529 GCSPictureGetStatusDesign GDesign* gwin.h Get picture status design
530 GCSChangeActiveFocus void gwin.h Change active focus
531 GCSNCPLCButtonSetAction void gncwin.h Set PLC button operations
532 GCSNCPLCButtonGetAction unsigned char gncwin.h Get PLC button operations
533 GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisplay void gncwin.h Set PLC button display
534 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisplay unsigned char gncwin.h Get PLC button display
535 GCSNCPLCButtonSetBorderID void gncwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
536 GCSNCPLCButtonGetBorderID unsigned short gncwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
537 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnDesign void gncwin.h Set ON status design
538 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnDesign GDesign* gncwin.h Get ON status design
539 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffDesign void gncwin.h Set OFF status design
540 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffDesign GDesign* gncwin.h Get OFF status design
541 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnDesign void gncwin.h Set ONON status design
542 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnDesign GDesign* gncwin.h Get ONON status design
543 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffDesign void gncwin.h Set ONOFF status design
544 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffDesign GDesign* gncwin.h Get ONOFF status design
545 GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusDesign void gncwin.h Set FOCUS status design
546 GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusDesign GDesign* gncwin.h Get FOCUS status design
547 GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisableDesign void gncwin.h Set Disable status design
548 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisableDesign GDesign* gncwin.h Get Disable status design
549 GCSNCPLCButtonSetFontID void gncwin.h Set font resource ID
550 GCSNCPLCButtonGetFontID unsigned short gncwin.h Get font resource ID

130
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

551 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnStringID void gncwin.h Set ON status caption
character string resource ID
552 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnStringID unsigned short gncwin.h Get ON status caption
character string resource ID
553 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffStringID void gncwin.h Set OFF status caption
character string resource ID
554 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffStringID unsigned short gncwin.h Get OFF status caption
character string resource ID
555 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnStringID void gncwin.h Set ONON status caption
character string resource ID
556 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnStringID unsigned short gncwin.h Get ONON status caption
character string resource ID
557 GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffStringID void gncwin.h Set ONOFF status caption
character string resource ID
558 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffStringID unsigned short gncwin.h Get ONOFF status caption
character string resource ID
559 GCSNCPLCButtonSetCaption void gncwin.h Set caption information
560 GCSNCPLCButtonGetCaption Gcaption * gncwin.h Get caption information
561 GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusEffect void gncwin.h Set effect during focus
562 GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusEffect unsigned char gncwin.h Get effect during focus
563 GCSNCPLCButtonSetStatus void gncwin.h Set object status
564 GCSNCPLCButtonGetStatus unsigned char gncwin.h Get object status
565 GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceType short gncwin.h Set PLC device operations
566 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceType short gncwin.h Get PLC device operations
567 GCSNCPLCButtonSetDevice short gncwin.h Set PLC device
568 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDevice short gncwin.h Get PLC device
569 GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceVal short gncwin.h Set PLC device value
570 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceVal short gncwin.h Get PLC device value
571 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBorderID void gncwin.h Set 3D border resource ID
572 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBorderID unsigned short gncwin.h Get 3D border resource ID
573 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFontID void gncwin.h Set font resource ID
574 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFontID unsigned short gncwin.h Get font resource ID
575 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCaption void gncwin.h Set caption information
576 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCaption Gcaption * gncwin.h Get caption information
577 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusEffect void gncwin.h Set effect during focus
578 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusEffect unsigned char gncwin.h Get effect during focus
579 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusColor void gncwin.h Set background color during
focus
580 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusColor GColor gncwin.h Get background color during
focus
581 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetNormalColor void gncwin.h Set normal background color

131
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

582 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetNormalColor GColor gncwin.h Get normal background color
583 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDisableColor void gncwin.h Set background color when
disabled
584 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDisableColor GColor gncwin.h Get background color when
disabled
585 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextType void gncwin.h Set character string type
586 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextType unsigned gncwin.h Get character string type
char
587 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetPasswordStatus void gncwin.h Set password display status
588 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetPasswordStatus short gncwin.h Get password display status
589 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCommaStatus void gncwin.h Set comma display status
590 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCommaStatus short gncwin.h Get comma display status
591 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus void gncwin.h Set maximum value check
status
592 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus short gncwin.h Get maximum value check
status
593 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMinStatus void gncwin.h Set minimum value check
status
594 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCheckMinStatus short gncwin.h Get minimum value check
status
595 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMaxGValue void gncwin.h Set maximum value
596 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMaxGValue GValue gncwin.h Get maximum value
597 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMinGValue void gncwin.h Set minimum value
598 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMinGValue GValue gncwin.h Get minimum value
599 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetString short gncwin.h Set display character string
600 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetString short gncwin.h Get display character string
601 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetGValue short gncwin.h Set display value
602 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetGValue short gncwin.h Get display value
603 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetStringBuffer short gncwin.h Set display buffer
604 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetStringBuffer GTCHAR* gncwin.h Get display buffer
605 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBackGroundPattern void gncwin.h Set background fill status
606 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBackGroundPattern short gncwin.h Get background fill status
607 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringStartPos void gncwin.h Set selected character string
start position
608 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringStartPos unsigned gncwin.h Get selected character string
short start position
609 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringEndPos void gncwin.h Set selected character string
end position
610 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringEndPos unsigned gncwin.h Get selected character string
short end position

132
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

611 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetIntegerWidth void gncwin.h Set integer part width
612 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetIntegerWidth unsigned gncwin.h Get integer part width
char
613 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDecimalWidth void gncwin.h Set decimal part width
614 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDecimalWidth unsigned gncwin.h Get decimal part width
char
615 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetScale void gncwin.h Set scale
616 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetScale void gncwin.h Get scale
617 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetOffset void gncwin.h Set offset
618 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetOffset long gncwin.h Get offset
619 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDevice short gncwin.h Set PLC device
620 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDevice short gncwin.h Get PLC device
621 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextSize void gncwin.h Set size
622 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextSize unsigned gncwin.h Get size
long
623 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetZeroSuppressStatus void gncwin.h Set zero suppress display
status
624 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetZeroSuppressStatus short gncwin.h Get zero suppress display
status
625 GCSNCTableSetCellForeColor void gncwin.h Set foreground color of each
cell
626 GCSNCTableSetCellBackColor void gncwin.h Set background color of each
cell
627 GCSNCTableSetCellString void gncwin.h Set character string of each
cell
628 GCSNCTableGetCellString void gncwin.h Get character string of each
cell
629 GCSNCTableSetSubCursorNum void gncwin.h Set sub-cursor position
630 GCSNCTableGetSubCursorNum void gncwin.h Get sub-cursor position
631 GCSNCTableSetCellWidth void gncwin.h Set cell width
632 GCSNCTableSetCellHight void gncwin.h Set cell height
633 GCSNCTableGetCellNumFromPoint void gncwin.h Get cell No. including pertinent
coordinates
634 GCSNCTableSetLineTitleString void gncwin.h Set line title
635 GCSNCTableGetLineTitleString void gncwin.h Get line title
636 GCSNCTableSetRowTitleString void gncwin.h Set row title
637 GCSNCTableGetRowTitleString void gncwin.h Get row title
638 GCSNCTableSetLineTitleStringPosition void gncwin.h Set line title character string
position
639 GCSNCTableSetRowTitleStringPosition void gncwin.h Set row title character string
position

133
 5. GCS
5.1 List of GCS Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

640 GCSNCTableSetCellStringPosition void gncwin.h Set area part character string
position
641 GCSNCTableSetBeforeSubCursorNum void gncwin.h Set last sub-cursor No.
642 GCSNCTableGetBeforeSubCursorNum void gncwin.h Get last sub-cursor No.
643 GCSNCTableSetLineTitleForeColor void gncwin.h Set foreground color of line title
644 GCSNCTableSetLineTitleBackColor void gncwin.h Set background color of line
title
645 GCSNCTableSetRowTitleForeColor void gncwin.h Set foreground color of row title
646 GCSNCTableSetRowTitleBackColor void gncwin.h Set background color of row
title
647 GCSNCTableSetSubCursorForeColor void gncwin.h Set foreground color of
sub-cursor
648 GCSNCTableSetSubCursorBackColor void gncwin.h Set background color of
sub-cursor

134
 5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetType

gwin.h
Outline Get object type

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetType(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Object type

Details Gets the object type.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetID

gwin.h
Outline Get object ID

Syntax Unsigned short GCSGetID(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Object ID

Details Gets the object ID.

File name gwin.h

135
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetXPosition

gwin.h
Outline Get horizontal position

Syntax short GCSGetXPosition(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Horizontal position

Details Gets the horizontal position of the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetYPosition

gwin.h
Outline Get vertical position

Syntax short GCSGetYPosition(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Vertical position

Details Gets the vertical position of the object.

File name gwin.h

136
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetPosition

gwin.h
Outline Set position

Syntax void GCSSetPosition(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GPoint *pPosition
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GPoint *pPosition : point structure being set

Return value None

Details Sets the position of the object using a point structure.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPosition

gwin.h
Outline Get position

Syntax void GCSGetPosition(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GPoint *pPosition
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GPoint *pPosition : point structure being stored

Return value None

Details Gets the position of the object using a point structure.

File name gwin.h

137
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetWidth

gwin.h
Outline Get width

Syntax short GCSGetWidth(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Width

Details Gets the object width.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetHeight

gwin.h
Outline Get height

Syntax short GCSGetHeight(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Height

Details Gets the object height.

File name gwin.h

138
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSize

gwin.h
Outline Get size

Syntax void GCSGetSize(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GPoint *pSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GPoint *pSize : point structure for which the size is being stored

Return value None

Details Gets the object size.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetBounds

gwin.h
Outline Set relative position within parent object

Syntax void GCSSetBounds(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GRect *pBounds
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GRect *pBounds : rectangle variable

Return value None

Details Sets the relative position of the object within parent object.

File name gwin.h

139
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetBounds

gwin.h
Outline Get relative position within parent object

Syntax void GCSGetBounds(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GRect *pBounds
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GRect *pBounds : rectangle variable

Return value None

Details Gets the relative position of the object within parent object.

File name gwin.h

GCSCalcClientRect

gwin.h
Outline Get coordinate position of client area

Syntax void GCSCalcClientRect(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GRect *pClient
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GRect *pClinet : client area coordinates

Return value None

Details Gets the client area for the object with the upper left of the object as the origin.

File name gwin.h

140
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetClientRect

gwin.h
Outline Get object client area

Syntax void GCSGetClientRect(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GRect *pClient
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GRect *pClinet : client area

Return value None

Details Gets the client area for the object.

Gets the rectangle with the upper left of the object as the origin.

File name gwin.h

GCSClientToScreen

gwin.h
Outline Convert client coordinates to screen coordinates

Syntax void GCSClientToScreen(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GRect *pRect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i/o) GRect *pRect : client coordinate rectangle being converted

Return value None

Details Converts the object client coordinates to screen coordinates.

File name gwin.h

141
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetStyle

gwin.h
Outline Batch style acquisition

Syntax unsigned long GCSGetStyle(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Style value

Details Gets the styles of the object all at once.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetVisibleStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set display/non-display status

Syntax void GCSSetVisibleStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : display/non-display status
FALSE : non-display
TRUE : display

Return value None

Details Sets the display/non-display status for the object.

When switching the display/non-display, the object area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

142
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetVisibleStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get display/non-display status

Syntax short GCSGetVisibleStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)
Argument
(i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Display/non-display status

FALSE : non-display
TRUE : display

Details Gets the display/non-display status for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetEnableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set controllable or uncontrollable status

Syntax void GCSSetEnableStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : controllable or uncontrollable status
FALSE : uncontrollable
TRUE : controllable

Return value None

Details Sets the controllable or uncontrollable status for the object.

Controllability with mouse input or key input is determined according to this flag.

File name gwin.h

143
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetEnableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get controllable or uncontrollable status

Syntax short GCSGetEnableStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)
Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value FALSE : uncontrollable

TRUE : controllable

Details Gets the controllable or uncontrollable status for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetConsumableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set input event consumable or input event not consumable status

Syntax void GCSSetConsumableStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : consumable/not consumable status
FALSE : not consumable
TRUE : consumable

Return value None

Details Sets the event consumption or non-consumption when the object has
uncontrollable status.
Whether the event is consumed or not consumed is controlled by this flag for
this object.

File name gwin.h

144
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetConsumableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get input event consumable or input event not consumable status

Syntax short GCSGetConsumableStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Consumable/not consumable status

FALSE : not consumable
TRUE : consumable

Details Gets the input event consumable or input event not consumable status.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetCaptionStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set caption display status

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : display/non-display status
FALSE : display
TRUE : non-display

Return value None

Details Sets the object caption display status.

Displaying or not displaying captions for the objects that have captions is
switched according to this setting.

File name gwin.h

145
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetCaptionStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get caption display status

Syntax short GCSGetCaptionStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Caption display status

FALSE : display
TRUE : non-display

Details Gets the object caption display status.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetFocusStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set focus status

Syntax void GCSSetFocusStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : focused/not focused status
FALSE : not focused
TRUE : focused

Return value None

Details Sets the object focus status for the object.

File name gwin.h

146
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetFocusStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get focus status

Syntax short GCSGetFocusStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Focus status

FALSE : not focused
TRUE : focused

Details Gets the object focus status for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetPanelStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set management panel object status

Syntax void GCSSetPanelStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : management panel status
FALSE : other than management panel object
TRUE : management panel object

Return value None

Details Sets the object as a management panel object or not.

File name gwin.h

147
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetPanelStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get management panel object status

Syntax short GCSGetPanelStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Management panel status

FALSE : other than management panel object
TRUE : management panel object

Details Gets the object focus status for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetStyleStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set style

Syntax void GCSSetStyleStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStyle,
short fStatus
)
Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation
(i) unsigned long ulStyle : style to be set
(i) short fStatus : specified style status

Return value None

Details Sets the object style.

With this method, it is necessary to redraw when redrawing is necessary to
make this setting.

File name gwin.h

148
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetStyleStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get style

Syntax short GCSGetStyleStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStyle
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStyle : style being acquired

Return value Specified style status (depends on style being acquired)

Details Gets the specified style status for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetParent

gwin.h
Outline Set parent object

Syntax void GCSSetParent(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pParent
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pParent : parent object being set

Return value None

Details Sets the parent object for managing the object.

File name gwin.h

149
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetParent

gwin.h
Outline Get parent object

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetParent(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value NULL : no parent object

Other than NULL : parent object

Details Gets the parent object for managing the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSImportProperty

gwin.h
Outline Import property settings

Syntax short GCSImportProperty(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
const GBaseWindowProperty *pImport
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) const GBaseWindowProperty *pImport : property structure

Return value FALSE : acquisition failed

TRUE : acquisition succeeded

Details Imports the property setting as a setting object.

File name gwin.h

150
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSExportProperty

gwin.h
Outline Export property settings

Syntax void GCSExportProperty(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseWindowProperty * pExport
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GBaseWindowProperty *pExport : property structure

Return value None

Details Exports the object setting to a property structure.

File name gwin.h

GCSCreate

gwin.h
Outline Create process

Syntax short GCSCreate(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pParent
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pParent : management object

Return value FALSE : creation failed

TRUE : creation succeeded

Details Creates an object.

File name gwin.h

151
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCreateVram

gwin.h
Outline Create process (create VRAM)

Syntax short GCSCreateVram(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pParent,
void *pData
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pParent : management object
(i) void *pData : additional information when drawing handle is
created

Return value FALSE : creation failed

TRUE : creation succeeded

Details Creates an object.

In the process for creating a GCScreen object, a drawing handle and drawing
context are created.

File name gwin.h

GCSDelete

gwin.h
Outline Delete process

Syntax void GCSDelete(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value None

Details Deletes an object.

File name gwin.h

152
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPaint

gwin.h
Outline Drawing process

Syntax void GCSPaint(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
HWDC hWDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) HWDC hWDC : drawing context

Return value None

Details Carries out drawing process for object GM_PAINT message.

Since there is no special distinction between the client area and non-client area
with the GBaseObject class, only client area drawing is called.

File name gwin.h

GCSOnDraw

gwin.h
Outline Client area drawing process

Syntax void GCSOnDraw(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
HWDC hWDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) HWDC hWDC : drawing context

Return value None

Details Carries out drawing process for object client area.

Since there is no special distinction between the client area and non-client area
with the GBaseObject class, calling is only for the client area.

File name gwin.h

153
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSOnNcDraw

gwin.h
Outline Non-client area drawing process

Syntax void GCSOnNcDraw(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
HWDC hWDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) HWDC hWDC : drawing context

Return value None

Details Carries out drawing process for object non-client area.

Since there is no special distinction between the client area and non-client area
with the GBaseObject class, non-client area is not called.

File name gwin.h

154
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSAddRefreshRect

gwin.h
Outline Client area redraw area registration

Syntax void GCSAddRefreshRect(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GRect *pRefreshRect,
short fErase
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GRect *pRefreshRect : area for redrawing (client coordinates)
(i) short fErase : background drawing present/none
GW_REFRESH_BGERASE : background drawing
GW_REFRESH_BGNOERASE : no background drawing

Return value None

Details Registers the redrawing area in object client coordinates. Background

redrawing present/none is selected using fErase.

File name gwin.h

155
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLButtonPress

gwin.h
Outline Process for pressing left mouse button

Syntax long GCSLButtonPress(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value FALSE : do not consume mouse event

TRUE : consume mouse event

Details Carries out the processing for pressing the left mouse button for the object.
Calls the left mouse button press processing for the client area.
When the mouse event is not consumed, FALSE is returned, and when the
mouse event is consumed, TRUE is returned.

File name gwin.h

156
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSOnLButtonPress

gwin.h
Outline Client area process for pressing left mouse button

Syntax long GCSOnLButtonPress(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value FALSE : do not consume mouse event

TRUE : consume mouse event

Details Carries out the processing for pressing the left mouse button for the client area
on the object.
When the mouse event is not consumed, FALSE is returned, and when the
mouse event is consumed, TRUE is returned.

File name gwin.h

157
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSOnNcLButtonPress

gwin.h
Outline Non-client area process for pressing left mouse button

Syntax long GCSOnNcLButtonPress(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value FALSE : do not consume mouse event

TRUE : consume mouse event

Details Carries out the processing for pressing the left mouse button for the non-client
area on the object.
When the mouse event is not consumed, FALSE is returned, and when the
mouse event is not consumed, TRUE is returned.

File name gwin.h

158
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLButtonRelease

gwin.h
Outline Process for releasing left mouse button

Syntax void GCSLButtonRelease(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for releasing the left mouse button for the object.
Calls the left mouse button release processing for the client area.

File name gwin.h

GCSOnLButtonRelease

gwin.h
Outline Client area process for releasing left mouse button

Syntax void GCSOnLButtonRelease(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for releasing the left mouse button for the client area
on the object.

File name gwin.h

159
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSOnNcLButtonRelease

gwin.h
Outline Non-client area process for releasing left mouse button

Syntax void GCSOnNcLButtonRelease(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for releasing the left mouse button for the non-client
area on the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSMouseMove

gwin.h
Outline Pointing device movement process

Syntax void GCSMouseMove(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for pointing device movement for the object. Calls
the pointing device movement processing for the client area.

File name gwin.h

160
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSOnMouseMove

gwin.h
Outline Pointing device client area movement process

Syntax void GCSOnMouseMove(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for pointing device movement for the object for the
client area.

File name gwin.h

GCSOnNcMouseMove

gwin.h
Outline Pointing device non-client area movement process

Syntax void GCSOnNcMouseMove(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
long ulStatus,
GPoint gptPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) long ulStatus : pressed button status
(i) GPoint gptPoint : position of point device coordinates

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for pointing device movement for the object for the
non-client area.

File name gwin.h

161
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSKeyPress

gwin.h
Outline Process for pressing key

Syntax long GCSKeyPress(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usKeyCode,
unsigned long ulStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usKeyCode : virtual key code
(i) unsigned long ulStatus : key status

Return value FALSE : do not consume key event

TRUE : consume key event

Details Carries out the processing for pressing a key for the object.
When the key event is not consumed, FALSE is returned, and when the key
event is consumed, TRUE is returned.

File name gwin.h

162
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSKeyRelease

gwin.h
Outline Process for releasing key

Syntax void GCSKeyRelease(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usKeyCode,
unsigned long ulStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usKeyCode : virtual key code
(i) unsigned long ulStatus : key status

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for releasing a key for the object.

File name gwin.h

163
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetFocus

gwin.h
Outline Focus setting process

Syntax void GCSSetFocus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for setting the focus for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSKillFocus

gwin.h
Outline Focus removing process

Syntax void GCSKillFocus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value None

Details Carries out the processing for removing the focus for the object.

File name gwin.h

164
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTimer

gwin.h
Outline Timer process

Syntax void GCSTimer(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usTimerID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usTimerID : timer ID

Return value None

Details Carries out the timer processing for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSUser

gwin.h
Outline User process

Syntax long GCSUser(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
long lLParam,
long lUParam
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) long lLParam : appended information (lower-side)
(i) long lUParam : appended information (upper-side)

Return value -1 : not supported

0 or more : arbitrary

Details Carries out the user processing for the object.

Null processing.

File name gwin.h

165
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetFocusInformation

gwin.h
Outline Set focus movement information

Syntax void GCSSetFocusInformation(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GFocusInformation *pFocusInfo
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GFocusInformation short *pFocusInfo : focus movement information

Return value None

Details Set focus movement information for the object.

In the case of a virtual key code where the object is not received in a key
operation for an object, focus movement follows this setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetFocusInformation

gwin.h
Outline Get focus movement information

Syntax GFocusInformation *GCSGetFocusInformation(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Pointer to focus movement information

Details Gets focus movement information for the object.

In the case of a virtual key code where the object is not received in a key
operation for an object, focus movement follows this setting.

File name gwin.h

166
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSChar

gwin.h
Outline Character input process

Syntax void GCSChar(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usCharCode,
unsigned long ulStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

unsigned short usCharCode : character code
unsigned long ulStatus : status

Return value None

Details Carries out the character input processing for the object.
When one byte size of characters is set as the character code in usCharCode,
processing is carried out for one-byte characters, and when two bytes size is
set, processing is carried out two-byte characters.

File name gwin.h

GCSClose

gwin.h
Outline Issue object close process request

Syntax void GCSClose(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value None

Details For a related parent object, a request for termination processing for the object is
issued.

File name gwin.h

167
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSDeleteChild

gwin.h
Outline Child object deletion process

Syntax void GCSDeleteChild(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pChild
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pChild : child object to be deleted

Return value None

Details Executes deletion processing for related child object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetMemorySpace

gwin.h
Outline Set memory information

Syntax void GCSSetMemorySpace(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned char ucType,
unsigned char ucPlane
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucType : memory management information type
(i) unsigned char ucPlane : memory management information plane

Return value None

Details Sets the memory management information used by the object.

File name gwin.h

168
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetMemorySpace

gwin.h
Outline Get memory information

Syntax void GCSGetMemorySpace(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned char *pType,
unsigned char *pPlane
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) unsigned char *pType : memory management information type
(o) unsigned char *pPlane : memory management information plane

Return value None

Details Gets the memory management information used by the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetDrawForceStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set forced drawing status

Syntax void GCSSetDrawForceStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : forced drawing status
FALSE : no forced drawing
TRUE : forced drawing

Return value None

Details Sets the forced drawing status for the object.

File name gwin.h

169
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetDrawForceStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get forced drawing status

Syntax short GCSGetDrawForceStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Forced drawing status

FALSE : no forced drawing
TRUE : forced drawing

Details Get object forced drawing status.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetRedrawStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set redraw status

Syntax void GCSSetRedrawStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : redraw status
FALSE : no redrawing
TRUE : redraw

Return value None

Details Sets the redrawing status for the object.

File name gwin.h

170
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetRedrawStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get redraw status

Syntax short GCSGetRedrawStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Redraw status

FALSE : no redrawing
TRUE : redraw

Details Gets the redrawing status for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSClearDrawStatus

gwin.h
Outline Clear drawing status

Syntax void GCSClearDrawStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value None

Details Clears the object drawing status.

File name gwin.h

171
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSAddDirtyRect

gwin.h
Outline Client area redraw area registration (internal processing function)

Syntax void GCSAddDirtyRect(

GBaseObject * pSelf,
GRect *pRefreshRect,
short fErase
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GRect *pRefreshRect : area for redrawing (client coordinates)
(i) short fErase : background drawing present/none
GW_REFRESH_BGERASE : background drawing
GW_REFRESH_BGNOERASE : no background drawing

Return value None

Details Registers the redrawing area in object client coordinates.

Background redrawing present/none is selected using fErase.

File name gwin.h

172
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetPrevTimerObject

gwin.h
Outline Set previous object on timer bidirectional list

Syntax void GCSSetPrevTimerObject(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pbwPrev
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pbwPrev : object being set

Return value None

Details Sets the previous list object on the timer bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPrevTimerObject

gwin.h
Outline Get previous object on timer bidirectional list

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetPrevTimerObject(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Previous object on timer bidirectional list

NULL : do not set
Other than NULL : pointer to previous object

Details Gets the previous list object on the timer bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

173
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetNextTimerObject

gwin.h
Outline Set next object on timer bidirectional list

Syntax void GCSSetNextTimerObject(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pbwNext
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pbwNext : object being set

Return value None

Details Sets the next list object on the timer bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetNextTimerObject

gwin.h
Outline Get next object on timer bidirectional list

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetNextTimerObject(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Next object on timer bidirectional list

NULL : do not set
Other than NULL : pointer to next object

Details Gets the next list object on the timer bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

174
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetBlinkStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set blink status

Syntax void GCSSetBlinkStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned char ucBlinkStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucBlinkStatus : blink status
GCBLINK_BLINK_OFF : OFF status
GCBLINK_BLINK_ON : ON status

Return value None

Details Sets the object blinking status for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetBlinkStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get blink status

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetBlinkStatus(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value blink status

GCBLINK_BLINK_OFF : OFF status
GCBLINK_BLINK_ON : ON status

Details Gets the object blinking status for the object.

File name gwin.h

175
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetParentPanel

gwin.h
Outline Get management panel object

Syntax void GCSGetParentPanel(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject **pPanel,
GBaseObject ** pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GBaseObject *pPanel : management panel object
(o) GBaseObject *pWindow : management window object

Return value None

Details Gets the panel object for managing the object.

Gets the window object matched to the object in the window.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetPrevBlinkControl

gwin.h
Outline Set previous object on blink bidirectional list

Syntax void GCSSetPrevBlinkControl(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pvPrev
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pvPrev : object being set

Return value None

Details Sets the previous list object on the blink bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

176
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetPrevBlinkControl

gwin.h
Outline Get previous object on blink bidirectional list

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetPrevBlinkControl(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Previous object on blink bidirectional list

NULL : do not set
Other than NULL : pointer to previous object

Details Gets the previous list object on the blink bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetNextBlinkControl

gwin.h
Outline Set next object on blink bidirectional list

Syntax void GCSSetNextBlinkControl(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pvNext
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pvNext : object being set

Return value None

Details Sets the next list object on the blink bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

177
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetNextBlinkControl

gwin.h
Outline Get next object on blink bidirectional list

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetNextBlinkControl(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Next object on blink bidirectional list

NULL : do not set
Other than NULL : pointer to next object

Details Gets the next list object on the blink bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetPrevScrollControl

gwin.h
Outline Set previous object on scroll bidirectional list

Syntax void GCSSetPrevScrollControl(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pvPrev
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pbPrev : object being set

Return value None

Details Sets the previous list object on the scroll bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

178
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetPrevScrollControl

gwin.h
Outline Get previous object on scroll bidirectional list

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetPrevScrollControl(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value previous object on scroll bidirectional list

NULL : do not set
Other than NULL : pointer to previous object

Details Gets the previous list object on the scroll bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetNextScrollControl

gwin.h
Outline Set next object on scroll bidirectional list

Syntax void GCSSetNextScrollControl(

GBaseObject * pSelf,
GBaseObject * pvNext
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pvNext : object being set

Return value None

Details Sets the next list object on the scroll bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

179
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetNextScrollControl

gwin.h
Outline Get next object on scroll bidirectional list

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetNextScrollControl(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Next object on scroll bidirectional list

NULL : do not set
Other than NULL : pointer to next object

Details Gets the next list object on the scroll bidirectional list held in the object.

File name gwin.h

180
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLoadData

gwin.h
Outline Load interpreter screen file

Syntax int GCSLoadData(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
HGIO fp,
GBaseWindowProperty *ptPropery,
short fImport
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) HGIO fp : file descriptor
(i/o)GBaseWindowProperty *ptProperty
: area storing the read property
(i) short fImport : indicates whether to import or not

Return value 0 : normal end

Other than 0 : error

Details Reads the screen data from current position in interpreter screen file.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetHWDCEnvironment

gwin.h
Outline Set drawing environment

Syntax void GCSSetHWDCEnvironment(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
HWDC hWDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i/o) HWDC hWDC : drawing handle

Return value None

Details Sets drawing environment to match object.

File name gwin.h

181
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetScreen

gwin.h
Outline Get screen object

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetScreen(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value Pointer to screen object

Details Gets screen object belonging to object.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetGBaseObject

gwin.h
Outline Set object management structure

Syntax void GCSSetGBaseObject(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseObject *pBaseObject
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pBaseObject : object management structure

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the management structure for the object being managed.

File name gwin.h

182
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetGBaseObject

gwin.h
Outline Get object management structure

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetGBaseObject(

GBaseObject *pSelf
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

Return value NULL : management structure does not exist

Other than NULL : pointer to management structure

Details Gets the management structure for the object being managed.

File name gwin.h

GCSFreeLoadData

gwin.h
Outline Release memory acquired by LoadData

Syntax int GCSFreeLoadData(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GBaseWindowProperty *ptProperty
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GBaseWindowProperty *ptProperty : property

Return value 0 : normal end

Other than 0 : error

Details Releases the memory acquired by LoadData.

File name gwin.h

183
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetModalStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set modal status

Syntax void GCSSetModalStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : window modal status
FALSE : none
TRUE : present

Return value None

Details Sets the modal window status.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetModalStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get modal window status

Syntax short GCSGetModalStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

Return value FALSE : none

TRUE : present

Details Gets the modal window status.

File name gwin.h

184
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetRetValue

gwin.h
Outline Get modal window return value

Syntax short GCSGetRetValue(

GBaseObject *pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

Return value Modal window return value

Details Gets the return value returned when the modal window closes.

File name gwin.h

GCSBeginModal

gwin.h
Outline Start process for modal window

Syntax void GCSBeginModal(

GBaseObject *pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

Return value None

Details Gives notice of the modal start for a window.

File name gwin.h

185
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEndModal

gwin.h
Outline End process for modal window

Syntax void GCSEndModal(

GBaseObject *pWindow,
short nRetValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

(i) short nRetValue : return value when modal window is closed

Return value None

Details Gives notice of the modal end for a window.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetTitleBarStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set title bar present/none status

Syntax void GCSSetTitleBarStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : title bar present/none status
FALSE : none
TRUE : present

Return value None

Details Sets the window title bar present or none.

When switching on/off, the object area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

186
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetTitleBarStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get title bar present/none status

Syntax short GCSGetTitleBarStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

Return value FALSE : none

TRUE : present

Details Gets the title bar present/none status.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetCloseButtonStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set close button present/none status

Syntax void GCSSetCloseButtonStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : close button present/none status
FALSE : none
TRUE : present

Return value None

Details Sets the window close button present or none.

When switching present or none, the object area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

187
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetCloseButtonStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get close button present/none status

Syntax short GCSGetCloseButtonStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

Return value FALSE : none

TRUE : present

Details Gets the close button present/none status.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetEdgeStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set window frame present/none status

Syntax void GCSSetEdgeStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : window frame present/none status
FALSE : none
TRUE : present

Return value None

Details Sets the window frame present or none.

When switching present or none, the object area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

188
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetEdgeStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get window frame present/none status

Syntax short GCSGetEdgeStatus(

GBaseObject *pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pWindow : object for operation

Return value FALSE : none

TRUE : present

Details Gets the window frame present/none status.

File name gwin.h

GCSAddChild

gwin.h
Outline Add child object

Syntax short GCSAddChild(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
GBaseObject *pChild
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pChild : child object to be added

Return value FALSE : addition failed

TRUE : addition succeeded

Details The child object specified by pChild is added to the child objects managed by
the panel.

File name gwin.h

189
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetChildList

gwin.h
Outline Get child object list

Syntax HGBWL GCSGetChildList(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value Child object list handle

Details Gets child object list handle.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetBackGroundDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set background design

Syntax void GCSSetBackGroundDesign(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) GDesign* pDesign : background design

Return value None

Details Sets background design.

After the background design is set, the panel area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

190
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetBackGroundDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get background design

Syntax GDesign* GCSGetBackGroundDesign(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value Pointer to background design

Details Gets pointer for background design.

File name gwin.h

GCSCreateChildren

gwin.h
Outline Process for creating child object

Syntax short GCSCreateChildren(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value FALSE : creation failed

TRUE : creation succeeded

Details Creates child object managed by GCPanel object. No processing by GCPanel.

Actual processing creates GCPanel in a derivative class.

File name gwin.h

191
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSDeleteAllChildren

gwin.h
Outline Delete all child objects

Syntax void GCSDeleteAllChildren(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value None

Details Deletes all child objects.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetChild

gwin.h
Outline Search child object

Syntax GBaseObject *GCSGetChild(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : ID for child object being searched

Return value NULL : child object with specified ID was not searched.
Other than NULL : pointer to child object with specified ID

Details Searches for a GCPanel child object having the specified ID.

File name gwin.h

192
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetChildAll

gwin.h
Outline Search child object search in frame

Syntax GBaseObject *GCSGetChildAll(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : ID for child object being searched

Return value NULL : child object with specified ID was not searched.
Other than NULL : pointer to child object with specified ID

Details Searches for a GCPanel child object having the specified ID.
When the child object is a frame, the search is also performed in the GCPanel
for the page currently displayed in that frame.

File name gwin.h

193
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetActiveChild

gwin.h
Outline Set active object

Syntax short GCSSetActiveChild(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
short nSearch,
GBaseObject *pActiveChild
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) short nSearch : method for specifying object
(i) GBaseObject *pChild : active child object

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details When the panel status is active, the child object receiving the focus is set.
The setting methods are the method of directly specifying the object and the
method of searching for the beginning and end of the child object list.
The following value is specified in nSearch.
GWINDOW_SEARCH_NON:

File name gwin.h

194
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetActiveChild

gwin.h
Outline Get active object (only direct child object)

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetActiveChild(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value NULL : no setting

Other than NULL : get active object

Details When the panel status is active, the child object receiving the focus is acquired.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetActiveControl

gwin.h
Outline Get active control (including terminal child objects)

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetActiveControl(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value NULL : no setting

Other than NULL : get active control

Details When the panel status is active, the child object receiving the control is
acquired.

File name gwin.h

195
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetBlinkOffInterval

gwin.h
Outline Set blinking OFF interval

Syntax void GCSSetBlinkOffInterval(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
long lInterval
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) long lInterval : blinking OFF interval

Return value None

Details Sets the interval for blinking OFF.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetBlinkOffInterval

gwin.h
Outline Get blinking OFF interval

Syntax long GCSGetBlinkOffInterval(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value blinking OFF interval

Details Gets the interval for blinking OFF.

File name gwin.h

196
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetBlinkOnInterval

gwin.h
Outline Set blinking ON interval

Syntax void GCSSetBlinkOnInterval(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
long lInterval
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) long lInterval : blinking ON interval

Return value None

Details Sets the interval for blinking ON.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetBlinkOnInterval

gwin.h
Outline Get blinking ON interval

Syntax long GCSGetBlinkOnInterval(

GBaseObject *pPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

Return value Blinking ON interval

Details Gets the interval for blinking ON.

File name gwin.h

197
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSAddBlinkControl

gwin.h
Outline Add caption blink control

Syntax void GCSAddBlinkControl(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pControl : control to be added

Return value None

Details Among the controls in the panel, the control for caption blinking is added to the
list.

File name gwin.h

GCSRemoveBlinkControl

gwin.h
Outline Delete caption blink control

Syntax void GCSRemoveBlinkControl(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pControl : control to be deleted

Return value None

Details Among the controls in the panel, the control for terminating caption blink is
deleted from the list.

File name gwin.h

198
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSAddScrollControl

gwin.h
Outline Add caption scroll control

Syntax void GCSAddScrollControl(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pControl : control to be added

Return value None

Details Among the controls in the panel, the control for caption scrolling is added to the
list.

File name gwin.h

GCSRemoveScrollControl

gwin.h
Outline Delete caption scroll control

Syntax void GCSRemoveScrollControl(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pControl : control to be deleted

Return value None

Details Among the controls in the panel, the control for terminating caption scroll is
deleted from the list.

File name gwin.h

199
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSDrawChildren

gwin.h
Outline Child object drawing process

Syntax void GCSDrawChildren(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
HWDC pDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : object for operation

(i) HWDC pDC : drawing context

Return value None

Details Carries out child object drawing process.

The drawing order is in order from the beginning of the list.

File name gwin.h

GCSAttachPanel

gwin.h
Outline Attach panel object

Syntax GBaseObject *GCSAttachPanel(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pNewPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pNewPanel : related GCPanel class

Return value Pointer to related panel object

Details Attaches panel object to screen/window.

File name gwin.h

200
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetPanel

gwin.h
Outline Get attached GCPanel object

Syntax GBaseObject *GCSGetPanel(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Pointer to related panel

Details Carries out acquisition of GCPanel object related to screen/window.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetSystemFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set system font resource ID

Syntax void GCSSetSystemFontID(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets system font resource ID.

After the system font resource ID is set, the entire screen is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

201
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSystemFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get system font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetSystemFontID(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets system font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetSystemBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set system 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSSetSystemBorderID(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets system 3D border resource ID.

After the system 3D border resource ID is set, the entire screen is registered as
a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

202
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSystemBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get system 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetSystemBorderID(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets system 3D border resource ID setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetSystemForeColor

gwin.h
Outline Set system foreground color

Syntax void GCSSetSystemForeColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : foreground color

Return value None

Details Sets system foreground color.

After the system foreground color is set, the entire screen is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

203
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSystemForeColor

gwin.h
Outline Get system foreground color

Syntax GColor GCSGetSystemForeColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value System foreground color

Details Gets system foreground color.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetSystemBackColor

gwin.h
Outline Set system background color

Syntax void GCSSetSystemBackColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : background color

Return value None

Details Sets system background color.

After the system background color is set, the entire screen is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

204
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSystemBackColor

gwin.h
Outline Get system background color

Syntax GColor GCSGetSystemBackColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value System background color

Details Gets system background color.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetSystemActiveColor

gwin.h
Outline Set system active color

Syntax void GCSSetSystemActiveColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : active color

Return value None

Details Sets system active color.

After the system active color is set, the entire screen is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

205
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSystemActiveColor

gwin.h
Outline Get system active color

Syntax GColor GCSGetSystemActiveColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value System active color

Details Gets system active color.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetSystemInactiveColor

gwin.h
Outline Set system inactive color

Syntax void GCSSetSystemInactiveColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : inactive color

Return value None

Details Sets system inactive color.

After the system inactive color is set, the entire screen is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

206
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSystemInactiveColor

gwin.h
Outline Get system inactive color

Syntax GColor GCSGetSystemInactiveColor(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value System inactive color

Details Gets system inactive color.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetFrame

gwin.h
Outline Get frame

Syntax GBaseObject *GCSGetFrame(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Pointer to frame managed by screen

Details Gets pointer to frame being managed by the screen.

File name gwin.h

207
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSAddWindow

gwin.h
Outline Add window

Syntax short GCSAddWindow(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pWindow : window object to be added

Return value FALSE : addition failed

TRUE : addition succeeded

Details Add window to the frame on the screen.

File name gwin.h

GCSChangeFocus

gwin.h
Outline Change focus

Syntax void GCSChangeFocus(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pNewObject
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pNewObject : object acquiring the focus

Return value None

Details Focus given to specified object.

File name gwin.h

208
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetFocus

gwin.h
Outline Get focus

Syntax GBaseObject *GCSGetFocus(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value NULL : no focus

Other than NULL : object having focus

Details Gets the pointer to the object having the focus.

File name gwin.h

GCSDispatchMessage

gwin.h
Outline Event dispatch process

Syntax long GCSDispatchMessage(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GEventMessage *gemMsg
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GEventMessage *gemMsgt : event message

Return value Supported event return values

Details Calls a message procedure for each event according to the event.

File name gwin.h

209
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetWDC

gwin.h
Outline Get drawing context

Syntax HWDC GCSGetWDC(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Pointer to drawing context

Details Gets drawing context being managed by the screen.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetHWDC

gwin.h
Outline Get drawing context

Syntax HWDC GCSGetHWDC(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Pointer to drawing context

Details Gets drawing context being managed by the screen.

File name gwin.h

210
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetPanelPlane

gwin.h
Outline Set memory area panel plane management information

Syntax void GCSSetPanelPlane(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned char ucIndex,
unsigned char ucFlag
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucIndex : panel plane No.
(i) unsigned char ucFlag : usage status (FALSE: unused, TRUE: used)

Return value None

Details Sets usage status for the panel plane in the memory area.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPanelPlane

gwin.h
Outline Get memory area panel plane management information

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetPanelPlane(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned char ucIndex
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucIndex : panel plane No.

Return value Usage status

FALSE : unused
TRUE : used

Details Gets usage status for the panel plane in the memory area.

File name gwin.h

211
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetWindowPlane

gwin.h
Outline Set memory area window plane management information

Syntax void GCSSetWindowPlane(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned char ucIndex,
unsigned char ucFlag
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucIndex : window plane No.
(i) unsigned char ucFlag : usage status (FALSE: unused, TRUE: used)

Return value None

Details Sets usage status for the panel plane in the memory area.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetWindowPlane

gwin.h
Outline Get memory area window plane management information

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetWindowPlane(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned char ucIndex
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucIndex : panel plane No.

Return value Usage status

FALSE : unused
TRUE : used

Details Gets usage status for the window plane in the memory area.

File name gwin.h

212
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetExitStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set exit information

Syntax void GCSSetExitStatus(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : exit information (TRUE: exit)

Return value None

Details Sets the exit information for applications using the GUI library.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetExitStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get exit information

Syntax short GCSGetExitStatus(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Exit information

FALSE : in operation
TRUE : exit

Details Gets the exit information for applications using the GUI library.

File name gwin.h

213
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetSystemStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set system information

Syntax void GCSSetSystemStatus(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned long ulSystem,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulSystem : system flag
(i) short fStatus : status (0: FALSE, 1: TRUE)

Return value None

Details Sets system status specified by ulSystem.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetSystemStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get system information

Syntax short GCSGetSystemStatus(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned long ulSystem
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulSystem : system flag

Return value Status

0 : FALSE
1 : TRUE

Details Gets system status specified by ulSystem.

File name gwin.h

214
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSDoModal

gwin.h
Outline Window modal display

Syntax short GCSDoModal(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pWindow,
long lLParam,
long lUParam
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pWindow : window object
(i) long lLParam : additional information (lower-side)
(i) long lUParam : additional information (upper-side)

Return value Modal window return value

Details Displays the window object specified by pWindow as a modal window.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetPaletteStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set system palette utilization status

Syntax void GCSSetPaletteStatus(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
short nStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) short nStatus : palette usage status

Return value None

Details Sets the usage status of the palette.

When FALSE is set, unused is the status.
When TRUE is set, used is the status.

File name gwin.h

215
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetPaletteStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get system palette utilization status

Syntax short GCSGetPaletteStatus(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value System palette usage status

FALSE : unused
TRUE : used

Details Gets the usage status of the palette.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetSystemPaletteID

gwin.h
Outline Set system palette resource ID

Syntax void GCSSetSystemPaletteID(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : palette resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the palette resource ID used by the system palette.

File name gwin.h

216
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetSystemPaletteID

gwin.h
Outline Get system palette resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetSystemPaletteID(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value System palette resource ID

Details Gets the palette resource ID used by the system palette.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetPaletteColors

gwin.h
Outline Set number of colors in system palette

Syntax void GCSSetPaletteColors(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned short usPaletteColors
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usPaletteColors : number of colors used by system palette

Return value None

Details Sets the number of colors used by the system palette.

File name gwin.h

217
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetPaletteColors

gwin.h
Outline Get number of colors in system palette

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetPaletteColors(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Number of colors used by system palette

Details Gets the number of colors used by the system palette.

File name gwin.h

GCSAddTimerObject

gwin.h
Outline Add object to system timer list

Syntax void GCSAddTimerObject(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pObject
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pObject : object to be added

Return value None

Details Adds the object specified by pObject to the system timer list. When registered
into this system timer list, the object’s function is call at a constant frequency
with usTimerID==GCSCREEN_BASE_TIMER_ID.

File name gwin.h

218
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRemoveTimerObject

gwin.h
Outline Delete object from system timer list

Syntax void GCSRemoveTimerObject(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pObject
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pObject : object to be deleted

Return value None

Details Deletes the object specified by pObject from the system timer list.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetWindow

gwin.h
Outline Get window

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetWindow(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
nsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : ID of window being acquired

Return value NULL : window for specified ID does not exist

Other than NULL : window object having specified ID

Details Gets the window having the ID specified by usID.

File name gwin.h

219
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetActiveWindow

gwin.h
Outline Get active window

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSGetActiveWindow(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value NULL : active window does not exist

Other than NULL : active window object

Details Gets the window having the ID specified by usID.

File name gwin.h

GCSShowPanel

gwin.h
Outline Display panel switching process

Syntax short GCSShowPanel(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lPage
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lPage : screen No. to be displayed

Return value FALSE : switching failed

TRUE : switching succeeded

Details Switched to the page specifying the panel currently displayed in the object.

File name gwin.h

220
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCreateInstance

gwin.h
Outline Create instance process

Syntax GBaseObject *GCSCreateInstance(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned short usType,
const GBaseWindowProperty *pProperty,
GBaseObject *pParent
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usType : object type
(i) const GBaseWindowProperty *pImport : object property
(i) GBaseObject *pParent : parent object

Return value NULL : creation failed

Other than NULL : created object

Details Creates instance of object registered in the project.

File name gwin.h

221
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPageLogOperation

gwin.h
Outline Switch screen according to screen history

Syntax short GCSPageLogOperation(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
short nOperation,
short nShowWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) short nOperation : screen transition method
(i) short nShowWindow : window recovery status

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Switches screens according to the screen history.

File name gwin.h

GCSDrawFrame

gwin.h
Outline Related panel drawing process

Syntax void GCSDrawFrame(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
HWDC pDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) HWDC pDC : drawing context

Return value None

Details Carries out drawing process for frame object related to GCScreen object.

File name gwin.h

222
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSDrawPanel

gwin.h
Outline Related GCPanel object drawing process

Syntax void GCSDrawPanel(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
HWDC pDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) HWDC pDC : drawing context

Return value None

Details Carries out drawing process for panel object related to GCScreen object.

File name gwin.h

223
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSOnDrawWindow

gwin.h
Outline Window drawing process

Syntax void GCSOnDrawWindow(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
HWDC pDC,
long lStart,
long lEnd,
long lNow,
GBaseObject **pWinArray,
GRect *pClip
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) HWDC pDC : drawing context
(i) long lStart : depth of starting window
(i) long lEnd : depth of ending window
(i) long lNow : depth of current window
(i) GBaseObject **pWinArray : drawing window array
(i) GRect *pClip : drawing area

Return value None

Details Carries out drawing process for object client area.

Calls related GCPanel object drawing process in GCScreen object.

File name gwin.h

224
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetSystemPalette

gwin.h
Outline Set system palette

Syntax void GCSSetSystemPalette(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value None

Details Carries out system palette setup according to the system palette settings.
When no palette is used, ends without making palette settings. When the
number of colors differs in the palette resource and system palette settings, the
lower number of colors is set.

File name gwin.h

GCSDrawBackGround

gwin.h
Outline Background drawing process

Syntax void GCSDrawBackGround(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
HWDC pDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) HWDC pDC : drawing context

Return value None

Details Carries out drawing of GCScreen object background.

File name gwin.h

225
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCreateGWindow

gwin.h
Outline Create window

Syntax short GCSCreateGWindow(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lPage
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lPage : display specified window

Return value FALSE : display failed

TRUE : display succeeded

Details Creates a window and displays it.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetScreenManager

gwin.h
Outline Set screen manager

Syntax void GCSSetScreenManager(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
GBaseObject *pScreenManager
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) GBaseObject *pScreenManager : screen manager object

Return value None

Details Sets up screen manager in screen objects for each module.

File name gwin.h

226
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetModuleID

gwin.h
Outline Set module ID

Syntax void GCSSetModuleID(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned long ulModuleID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulModuleID : module ID

Return value None

Details Sets up ID in screen objects for each module.

File name gwin.h

GCSClearPageLog

gwin.h
Outline Clear screen history

Syntax void GCSClearPageLog(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value None

Details Clears the screen history.

File name gwin.h

227
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSAddPageLog

gwin.h
Outline Add to screen history

Syntax short GCSAddPageLog(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lPage
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lPage : screen No. to be added

Return value TRUE : addition succeeded

FALSE : addition failed

Details Adds to the screen history.

File name gwin.h

GCSPrevPage

gwin.h
Outline Issue request for displaying previous screen

Syntax short GCSPrevPage(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
short nShowWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) short nShowWindow : restore window status
FALSE : do not restore
TRUE : restore

Return value TRUE : succeeded

FALSE : failed

Details Issues a request to display the screen displayed previously based on the
screen history information.

File name gwin.h

228
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNextPage

gwin.h
Outline Issue request for displaying next screen

Syntax short GCSNextPage(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
short nShowWindow
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) short nShowWindow : restore window status
FALSE : do not restore
TRUE : restore

Return value TRUE : succeeded

FALSE : failed

Details Issues a request to display the screen displayed afterward based on the screen
history information.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetPageOffset

gwin.h
Outline Set module page offset

Syntax void GCSSetPageOffset(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lOffset
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lOffset : page offset

Return value None

Details Sets the page offset for the module to which the screen belongs.

File name gwin.h

229
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetPageOffset

gwin.h
Outline Get module page offset

Syntax long GCSGetPageOffset(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Page offset

Details Gets the page offset for the module to which the screen belongs.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetOperationLog

gwin.h
Outline Get operation log

Syntax short GCSGetOperationLog(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
unsigned short usIndex,
GOperationInformation *pLog
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usIndex : index No.
(i) GOperationInformation *pLog : variable storing operation log being acquired

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Gets the operation log in the position specified by usIndex.

File name gwin.h

230
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSClearOperationLog

gwin.h
Outline Clear operation log

Syntax short GCSClearOperationLog(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Clears the content of the operation log.

File name gwin.h

GCSAddOperationLog

gwin.h
Outline Add operation log (operation event)

Syntax short GCSAddOperationLog(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lPage,
unsigned short usID,
unsigned short usMessage
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lPage : screen No.
(i) unsigned short usID : object ID
(i) unsigned short usMessage : event

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Adds the operation log with the specified log content.

File name gwin.h

231
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSAddChangePageLog

gwin.h
Outline Add operation log (screen switching)

Syntax short GCSAddChangePageLog(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lOldPage,
long lNewPage
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lOldPage : screen No. prior to screen switching
(i) long lNewPage : screen No. following screen switching

Return value FALSE : failed

TRUE : succeeded

Details Adds the operation log with the specified log content.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPageNumber

gwin.h
Outline Get screen No.

Syntax long GCSGetPageNumber(

GBaseObject *pScreen
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

Return value Currently displayed screen No.

Details Returns the currently displayed screen No.

File name gwin.h

232
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLoadProjectFile

gwin.h
Outline Load interpreter project file

Syntax int GCSLoadProjectFile(

GBaseObject *pIScreen,
GTCHAR *ptszProjectPath,
short fShowStartPanel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pIScreen; : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *ptszProjectPath : project file to be loaded
(i) short fShowStartPanel : display/non-display of initial display page
FALSE : non-display
TRUE : display

Return value 0 : normal end

Other than 0 : error

Details Reads project data from the interpreter project file.

File name gwin.h

233
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLoadGWindow

gwin.h
Outline Window loading process

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSLoadGWindow(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lPage
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lPage : window No. to load

Return value NULL : load failed

Other than NULL : load succeeded

Details Loads the window with the specified No.

File name gwin.h

GCSModalGWindow

gwin.h
Outline Modal window process

Syntax short GCSModalGWindow(

GBaseObject *pScreen,
long lPage
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScreen : object for operation

(i) long lPage : modal window No.

Return value Modal window return value

Details Displays the window with the number specified as a modal window.

File name gwin.h

234
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetBlinkType

gwin.h
Outline Set blink type

Syntax void GCSSetBlinkType(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned char ucBlinkType
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucBlinkType
GCBLINK_CHANGE_VISIBLE_STRING : display/non-display of character
string
GCBLINK_CHANGE_STRING_COLOR : change character color
GCBLINK_CHANGE_WHOLE_COLOR : change whole color

Return value None

Details Sets the object blink type.

File name gwin.h

235
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetBlinkType

gwin.h
Outline Get blink type

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetBlinkType(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Blink type:

GCBLINK_CHANGE_VISIBLE_STRING : display/non-display of character
string
GCBLINK_CHANGE_STRING_COLOR : change character color
GCBLINK_CHANGE_WHOLE_COLOR : change whole color

Details Gets the object blink type.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetBlinkEnableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set blink operation

Syntax void GCSSetBlinkEnableStatus(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned char ucEnable
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucEnable : blink operation setting
GCBLINK_BLINK_DISABLE : disable
GCBLINK_BLINK_ENABLE : enable

Return value None

Details Sets the object blink operation.

File name gwin.h

236
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetBlinkEnableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get blink operation

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetBlinkEnableStatus(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Setup of blink operation

FALSE : disable
TRUE : enable

Details Gets the object blink operation.

File name gwin.h

GCSStartCaptionBlink

gwin.h
Outline Start blink operation

Syntax void GCSStartCaptionBlink(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value None

Details Starts the object blink operation.

File name gwin.h

237
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSStopCaptionBlink

gwin.h
Outline Stop blink operation

Syntax void GCSStopCaptionBlink(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value None

Details Stops the object blink operation.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetCaptionScrollEnable

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll operation

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionScrollEnable(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned char ucEnable
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucEnable : scroll operation setting
GCSCROLL_SCROLL_DISABLE : disable
GCSCROLL_SCROLL_ENABLE : enable
GCSCROLL_SCROLL_OUTOFBOUNDS : enable when out of bounds

Return value None

Details Sets the object scroll operation.

File name gwin.h

238
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetCaptionScrollEnable

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll operation

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetCaptionScrollEnable(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Scroll operation

GCSCROLL_SCROLL_DISABLE : disable
GCSCROLL_SCROLL_ENABLE : enable
GCSCROLL_SCROLL_OUTOFBOUNDS : enable when out of bounds

Details Gets the object scroll operation.

File name gwin.h

GCSStartCaptionScroll

gwin.h
Outline Start scroll operation

Syntax void GCSStartCaptionScroll(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value None

Details Starts the object scroll operation.

The scroll operation must be set in GCSCROLL_SCROLL_ENABLE or
GCSCROLL_SCROLL_OUTOFBOUNDS in advance.

File name gwin.h

239
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSStopCaptionScroll

gwin.h
Outline Stop scroll operation

Syntax void GCSStopCaptionScroll(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value None

Details Stops the object scroll operation.

File name gwin.h

GCSPauseCaptionScroll

gwin.h
Outline Pause scroll operation

Syntax void GCSPauseCaptionScroll(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value None

Details Pauses the object scroll operation.

File name gwin.h

240
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRestartCaptionScroll

gwin.h
Outline Restart scroll operation

Syntax void GCSRestartCaptionScroll(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value None

Details Restart the object scroll operation.

File name gwin.h

GCSSetCaptionScrollStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll operation status

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionScrollStatus(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned char ucStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucStatus : scroll operation status

Return value None

Details Sets the object scroll operation status.

File name gwin.h

241
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSGetCaptionScrollStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll operation status

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetCaptionScrollStatus(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Scroll operation status

Details Gets the object scroll operation status.

File name gwin.h

GCSIsCaptionOutOfBounds

gwin.h
Outline Confirm overflowing of caption character string

Syntax short GCSIsCaptionOutOfBounds(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Out of bounds status

FALSE : not out of bounds
TRUE : out of bounds

Details Confirms whether or not the caption character string set in the control goes out
of the bounds of the control caption display area.

File name gwin.h

242
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetCaptionScrollDelayTime

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll delay time

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionScrollDelayTime(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned long lTime
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulTime : delay time setting

Return value None

Details Sets the delay time for the object scroll starting time.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetCaptionScrollDelayTime

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll delay time

Syntax unsigned long GCSGetCaptionScrollDelayTime(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Delay time

Details Gets the delay time for the object scroll starting time.

File name gwin.h

243
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetCaptionScrollRefreshTime

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll refresh time

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionScrollRefreshTime(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned long lTime
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulTime : refresh time setting

Return value None

Details Sets the object scroll refresh time.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetCaptionScrollRefreshTime

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll refresh time

Syntax unsigned long GCSGetCaptionScrollRefreshTime(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Refresh time

Details Gets the object scroll refresh time.

File name gwin.h

244
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetCaptionScrollMovementValue

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll movement value

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionScrollMovementValue(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned short usMovementValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usMovementValue : movement value setting

Return value None

Details Sets the object scroll movement value.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetCaptionScrollMovementValue

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll movement value

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetCaptionScrollMovementValue(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Movement value

Details Gets the object scroll movement value.

File name gwin.h

245
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetCaptionScrollStartPosition

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll start position

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionScrollStartPosition(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned char ucStartPosition
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucStartPosition : start position setting
GCSCROLL_START_NOW : Follow current caption setting.
GCSCROLL_START_RIGHT : From right.

Return value None

Details Sets the object scroll start position.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetCaptionScrollStartPosition

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll start position

Syntax unsigned char GCSGetCaptionScrollStartPosition(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Start position

GCSCROLL_START_NOW : Follow current caption setting.
GCSCROLL_START_RIGHT : From right.

Details Gets the object scroll start position.

File name gwin.h

246
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetCaptionScrollPosition

gwin.h
Outline Set total scroll movement value

Syntax void GCSSetCaptionScrollPosition(

GBaseObject *pControl,
long lPosition
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usMovementValue : total movement value setting

Return value None

Details Sets the total scroll movement value from the start position for the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetCaptionScrollPosition

gwin.h
Outline Get total scroll movement value

Syntax long GCSGetCaptionScrollPosition(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Total movement value

Details Gets the total scroll movement value from the start position for the object.

File name gwin.h

247
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSUpdateScroll

gwin.h
Outline Scroll update process

Syntax void GCSUpdateScroll(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value None

Details Carries out object scroll update process.

File name gwin.h

GCSIsCaptionScrollFinish

gwin.h
Outline Confirm caption scroll completion

Syntax short GCSIsCaptionScrollFinish(

GBaseObject *pControl
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

Return value Scroll finish status

FALSE : scrolling
TRUE : scrolling finish

Details Confirms whether the caption character string set in the control is being
scrolled.

File name gwin.h

248
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCallBackMessage

gwin.h
Outline Call back message execution process

Syntax long GCSCallBackMessage(

GBaseObject *pControl,
unsigned short usMessage,
long lLParam,
long lUParam
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pControl : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usMessage : call back message type
(i) long lLParam : appended information (lower-side)
(i) long lUParam : appended information (upper-side)

Return value Arbitrary

Details For a parent class managing the object, executes call-back processing
prepared for an object ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSLoadScreenFile

gwin.h
Outline Load interpreter screen file

Syntax int GCSLoadScreenFile(

GBaseObject *pIScreen,
long nPageNo
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pIScreen : object for operation

(i) long nPageNo : screen No. to load

Return value 0 : normal end

Other than 0 : error

Details Reads the interpreter screen file.

File name gwin.h

249
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetPenColor

gwin.h
Outline Set line color

Syntax void GCSSetPenColor(

GBaseObject *pShape,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pShape : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : line color

Return value None

Details Sets the line color for the drawing/line drawing.

After the line color is set, the drawing/line drawing area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPenColor

gwin.h
Outline Get line color

Syntax GColor GCSGetPenColor(

GBaseObject *pShape
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pShape : object for operation

Return value Line color

Details Gets the line color for the drawing/line drawing.

File name gwin.h

250
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetPenDash

gwin.h
Outline Set line type

Syntax void GCSSetPenDash(

GBaseObject *pShape,
unsigned short usPenDash
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pShape : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usPenDash : line type

Return value None

Details Sets the line type for the drawing/line drawing.

One of the following values is set for usPenDash:
0 : solid line
1-8 : line type
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.
After the line type is set, the drawing/line drawing area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPenDash

gwin.h
Outline Get line type

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetPenDash(

GBaseObject *pShape
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pShape : object for operation

Return value 0 : solid line

1-8 : line type

Details Gets the line type for the drawing/line drawing.

File name gwin.h

251
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetPenSize

gwin.h
Outline Set line width

Syntax void GCSSetPenSize(

GBaseObject *pShape,
unsigned short usPenSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pShape : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usPenSize : line width

Return value None

Details Sets the line width for the drawing/line drawing.

After the line width is set, the drawing/line drawing area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPenSize

gwin.h
Outline Get line width

Syntax unsigned short GCSGetPenSize(

GBaseObject *pShape
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pShape : object for operation

Return value Line width

Details Gets the line width for the drawing/line drawing.

File name gwin.h

252
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetAngle

gwin.h
Outline Set start angle and finish angle for sector and arc

Syntax void GCSSetAngle(

GBaseObject *pSArc,
short nStartAngle,
short nEndAngle
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSArc : object for operation

(i) short nStartAngle : start angle
(i) short nEndAngle : end angle

Return value None

Details Sets the start angle and end angle for sector and arcs.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetAngle

gwin.h
Outline Get start angle and finish angle for sector and arc

Syntax void GCSGetAngle(

GBaseObject *pSArc,
short *nStartAngle,
short *nEndAngle
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSArc : object for operation

(o) short *nStartAngle : start angle
(o) short *nEndAngle : end angle

Return value None

Details Gets the start angle and end angle for sector and arcs.

File name gwin.h

253
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetBrush

gwin.h
Outline Set fill brush

Syntax void GCSSetBrush(

GBaseObject *pSRect,
GBrush *pBrush
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSRect : object for operation

(i) GBrush *pBrush : brush being set

Return value None

Details Sets the brush used for drawing fill.

After the brush is set, the drawing area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetBrush

gwin.h
Outline Get fill brush

Syntax GBrush* GCSGetBrush(

GBaseObject *pSRect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSRect : object for operation

Return value Pointer to fill brush

Details Gets the brush used for drawing fill.

File name gwin.h

254
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetStartPoint

gwin.h
Outline Set line drawing starting point

Syntax void GCSSetStartPoint(

GBaseObject *pSLine,
GPoint *pPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSLine : object for operation

(i) GPoint *pPoint : line drawing starting point

Return value None

Details Sets the line drawing starting point.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetStartPoint

gwin.h
Outline Get line drawing starting point

Syntax void GCSGetStartPoint(

GBaseObject *pSLine,
GPoint *pPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSLine : object for operation

(o) GPoint *pPoint : variable storing line drawing starting point

Return value None

Details Gets the line drawing starting point.

File name gwin.h

255
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetEndPoint

gwin.h
Outline Set line drawing end point

Syntax void GCSSetEndPoint(

GBaseObject *pSLine,
GPoint *pPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSLine : object for operation

(i) GPoint *pPoint : line drawing end point

Return value None

Details Sets the line drawing end point.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetEndPoint

gwin.h
Outline Get line drawing end point

Syntax void GCSGetEndPoint(

GBaseObject *pSLine,
.GPoint *pPoint
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSLine : object for operation

(o) GPoint *pPoint : variable storing line drawing end point

Return value None

Details Gets the line drawing end point.

File name gwin.h

256
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetPoly

gwin.h
Outline Set polygon/continuous line

Syntax short GCSSetPoly(

GBaseObject *pSPoly,
GPoly *pPoly
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSPoly : object for operation

(i) GPoly *pPoly : polygon structure

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets polygon/continuous line data.

Vertex data has memory allocated and is held as internal data.

File name gwin.h

GCSGetPoly

gwin.h
Outline Get polygon/continuous line

Syntax GPoly* GCSGetPoly(

GBaseObject *pSPoly
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSPoly : object for operation

Return value Pointer to polygon structure

Details Gets polygon/continuous line data.

File name gwin.h

257
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSSetDrawAttribute

gwin.h
Outline Set drawing attributes for figure

Syntax void GCSSetDrawAttribute(

GBaseObject *pShape,
HWDC pDC
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pShape : object for operation

(i) HWDC pDC : drawing handle

Return value None

Details Sets the drawing attributes.

The drawing attributes set are perimeter color, perimeter line type, perimeter
line width and fill brush.

File name gwin.h

258
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonSetAction

gwin.h
Outline Set button operations

Syntax void GCSButtonSetAction(

GBaseObject *pButton,
unsigned char ucAction
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucAction : button operation

Return value None

Details Sets the button operation.

One of the following values is set for ucAction:
GBTN_ACT_NOACTION : no operation
GBTN_ACT_MOMENTARY : momentary operation
GBTN_ACT_ALTERNATE : alternative operation
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.

File name gwin.h

259
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetAction

gwin.h
Outline Get button operations

Syntax unsigned char GCSButtonGetAction(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value GBTN_ACT_NOACTION : no operation

GBTN_ACT_MOMENTARY : momentary operation
GBTN_ACT_ALTERNATE : alternative operatio
Besides the above : illegal operation setting

Details Gets the button operation setting.

When a setting outside the range is made, that setting value is returned.

File name gwin.h

260
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonSetDisplay

gwin.h
Outline Set button display

Syntax void GCSButtonSetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pButton,
unsigned char ucDisplay
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucDisplay : button display

Return value None

Details Sets the button display.

One of the following values is set for ucDisplay:
GBTN_DISP_RECT : rectangle display
GBTN_DISP_OVAL : round shape display
GBTN_DISP_IMAGE : image display
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.
After the button display is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

261
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetDisplay

gwin.h
Outline Get button display

Syntax unsigned char GCSButtonGetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value GBTN_DISP_RECT : rectangle display

GBTN_DISP_OVAL : round shape display
GBTN_DISP_IMAGE : image display
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the button display setting.

When a setting outside the range is made, that setting value is returned.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSButtonSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

262
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSButtonGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetOnDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set ON status design

Syntax void GCSButtonSetOnDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton,
GDesign* pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign* pDesign : design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for ON status.

After the design for ON status is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

263
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetOnDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get ON status design

Syntax GDesign* GCSButtonGetOnDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Pointer to design

Details Gets the design for ON status.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetOffDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set OFF status design

Syntax void GCSButtonSetOffDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign* pDesign : design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for OFF status.

After the design for OFF status is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

264
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetOffDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get OFF status design

Syntax GDesign* GCSButtonGetOffDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Pointer to design

Details Gets the design for OFF status.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetFocusDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set FOCUS status design

Syntax void GCSButtonSetFocusDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign* pDesign : design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for FOCUS status.

After the design for FOCUS status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

265
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetFocusDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get FOCUS status design

Syntax GDesign* GCSButtonGetFocusDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Pointer to design

Details Gets the design for FOCUS status.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetDisableDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set Disable status design

Syntax void GCSButtonSetDisableDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign* pDesign : design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for Disable status.

After the design for Disable status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

266
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetDisableDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get Disable status design

Syntax GDesign* GCSButtonGetDisableDesign(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Pointer to design

Details Gets the design for Disable status.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSButtonSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

267
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSButtonGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Set caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSButtonSetStringID(

GBaseObject *pButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the caption character string resource ID.

After the caption character string resource ID is set, the control area is
registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

268
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Get caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSButtonGetStringID(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the caption character string resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSButtonSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pButton,
GCaption * pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information

Return value None

Details Sets pCaption in caption information.

After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

269
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSButtonGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Set effect during focus

Syntax void GCSButtonSetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pButton,
unsigned char ucFocusEffect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucFocusEffect : effect during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the effect during focus.

One of the following values is set for ucFocusEffect:
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change
GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
After the effect is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

270
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Get effect during focus

Syntax unsigned char GCSButtonGetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change

GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the effect used during focus.

File name gwin.h

GCSButtonSetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set object status

Syntax void GCSButtonSetStatus(

GBaseObject *pButton,
unsigned char ucStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucStatus : set object status

Return value None

Details Sets the GCButton object status.

After the GCButton object status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

271
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSButtonGetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get object status

Syntax unsigned char GCSButtonGetStatus(

GBaseObject *pButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pButton : object for operation

Return value Object status

Details Gets the GCButton object status.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

272
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSCheckboxGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

273
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSCheckboxGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Set caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetStringID(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID.

Return value None

Details Sets the caption character string resource ID.

After the caption character string resource ID is set, the control area is
registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

274
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Get caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSCheckboxGetStringID(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID.

Details Gets the caption character string resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information

Return value None

Details Sets pCaption in caption information

All except character color are invalid.
After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

275
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSCheckboxGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information setting.

All settings except character color are invalid.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Set effect during focus

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
unsigned char ucFocusEffect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucFocusEffect : effect during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the effect during focus.

One of the following values is set for ucFocusEffect:
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change
GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
After the effect is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

276
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Get effect during focus

Syntax unsigned char GCSCheckboxGetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change

GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the effect used during focus.

File name gwin.h

277
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxSetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set object status

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetStatus(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
unsigned char ucStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucStatus : set object status

Return value None

Details Sets status for GCCheckBox object.

One of the following values is set for ucStatus:
GCHK_STATE_OFF : OFF status
GCHK_STATE_ON : ON status
GCHK_STATE_OFFSELECT : OFF selection status
GCHK_STATE_ONSELECT : ON selection status
When a setting outside of the range is made, there is no forced change of the
setting.

File name gwin.h

278
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get object status

Syntax unsigned char GCSCheckboxGetStatus(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value GCHK_STATE_OFF : OFF status

GCHK_STATE_ON : ON status
GCHK_STATE_OFFSELECT : OFF selection status
GCHK_STATE_ONSELECT : ON selection status
Besides the above : undefined status

Details Gets status for GCCheckBox object.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetBoxSize

gwin.h
Outline Set box size

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetBoxSize(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
unsigned short ucBoxSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : check box size

Return value None

Details Sets the box size.

After the box size is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

279
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetBoxSize

gwin.h
Outline Get box size

Syntax unsigned short GCSCheckboxGetBoxSize(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Box size

Details Gets the box size settings.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Set box color

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : box color

Return value None

Details Sets the box color.

After the box color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

280
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Get box color

Syntax GColor GCSCheckboxGetBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Box color

Details Gets the box color.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color during focus

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : background color during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the background color when the effect during focus is
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR.
After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

281
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color during focus

Syntax GColor GCSCheckboxGetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Background color during focus

Details Gets the background color when the effect during focus is
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetDisableCaptionColor

gwin.h
Outline Set character color when disabled

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetDisableCaptionColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : character color when disabled

Return value None

Details Sets the character color during disabled control.

After the character color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

282
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetDisableCaptionColor

gwin.h
Outline Get character color when disabled

Syntax GColor GCSCheckboxGetDisableCaptionColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Character color when disabled

Details Gets the character color during disabled control.

File name gwin.h

GCSCheckboxSetDisableBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Set box color when disabled

Syntax void GCSCheckboxSetDisableBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : box color

Return value None

Details Sets the box color during disabled control.

After the box color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

283
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSCheckboxGetDisableBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Get box color when disabled

Syntax GColor GCSCheckboxGetDisableBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pCheckBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pCheckBox : object for operation

Return value Box color when disabled

Details Gets the box color during disabled control.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSEditSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

284
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSEditGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSEditSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

285
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSEditGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditAddString

gwin.h
Outline Add character string

Syntax short GCSEditAddString(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszString
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) char *pszString : character string to be added

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Adds the character string to the end.

File name gwin.h

286
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetString

gwin.h
Outline Set display character string

Syntax short GCSEditSetString(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
const GTCHAR * pString
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) const char *pString : display character string

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the display character string.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetString

gwin.h
Outline Get display character string

Syntax short GCSEditGetString(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pString,
long lMaxCount
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(o) char *pString : buffer where display character string is stored
(i) long lMaxCount : buffer size

Return value FALSE : acquisition failed

TRUE : acquisition succeeded

Details Stores the display character string in pString.

File name gwin.h

287
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetTextColor

gwin.h
Outline Set character display color

Syntax void GCSEditSetTextColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for character display color

Return value None

Details Sets the character display color.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetTextColor

gwin.h
Outline Get character display color

Syntax GColor GCSEditGetTextColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Color code for character display color

Details Gets the character display color.

File name gwin.h

288
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetBackColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color

Syntax void GCSEditSetBackColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color

Return value None

Details Sets the background color.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetBackColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color

Syntax GColor GCSEditGetBackColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color

Details Gets the background color.

File name gwin.h

289
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetBrush

gwin.h
Outline Set brush

Syntax void GCSEditSetBrush(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GBrush *pBrush
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GBrush *pBrush : brush structure

Return value TRUE : processing succeeded

FALSE : processing failed

Details Sets the brush.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditDeleteString

gwin.h
Outline Delete character string

Syntax void GCSEditDeleteString(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value None

Details Deletes all the character strings.

File name gwin.h

290
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditAddLine

gwin.h
Outline Add line

Syntax short GCSEditAddLine(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszLine
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *pszLine : line to be added

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Adds the character string as a new line at the end.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditInsertLine

gwin.h
Outline Insert line

Syntax short GCSEditInsertLine(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszLine,
unsigned long ulLine
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *pszLine : line to be inserted
(i) unsigned long ulLine : line No.

Return value 0 : processing failed

Other than 0 : number of lines inserted

Details Inserts the character string as a new line at specified position.

File name gwin.h

291
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditDeleteLine

gwin.h
Outline Delete line

Syntax short GCSEditDeleteLine(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned long ulLine
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulLine : line No.

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Deletes the specified line.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetLineString

gwin.h
Outline Get line character string

Syntax short GCSEditGetLineString(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned long ulLine,
GTCHAR *pszString,
long lMaxCount
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulLine : line No.
(i) GTCHAR *pszString : buffer where character string is saved
(i) long lMaxCount : buffer size

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Gets the character string for the specified line.

File name gwin.h

292
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetLineFeedCode

gwin.h
Outline Set line feed character string

Syntax void GCSEditSetLineFeedCode(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned char ucLineFeedCode
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

unsigned short usLineFeedType : line feed character type

Return value None

Details Sets the line feed character string type.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetLineFeedCode

gwin.h
Outline Get line feed character string

Syntax unsigned char GCSEditGetLineFeedCode(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value line feed character string type

GEDIT_LF_TYPE_CRLF : \r\n
GEDIT_LF_TYPE_LF : \n
GEDIT_LF_TYPE_CR : \r

Details Gets the line feed character string type.

File name gwin.h

293
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetCursor

gwin.h
Outline Set cursor position

Syntax short GCSEditSetCursor(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned long ulLine,
unsigned long ulIndex
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulLine : line No.
(i) unsigned long ulindex : specified index

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Sets the cursor position to the specified position.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetCursor

gwin.h
Outline Get cursor position

Syntax short GCSEditGetCursor(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned long *pulLine,
unsigned long *pulIndex
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long *pulLine : line No.
(i) unsigned long *pulindex : specified index

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Gets the cursor position.

File name gwin.h

294
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetForeColor

gwin.h
Outline Set foreground color

Syntax void GCSEditSetForeColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for foreground color

Return value None

Details Sets the foreground color.

After the foreground color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetForeColor

gwin.h
Outline Get foreground color

Syntax GColor GCSEditGetForeColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Color code for foreground color

Details Gets the foreground color.

File name gwin.h

295
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetFillPattern

gwin.h
Outline Set fill pattern

Syntax void GCSEditSetFillPattern(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
short nFillPattern
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) short nFillPattern : fill pattern

Return value None

Details Sets the fill pattern.

After the fill pattern is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetFillPattern

gwin.h
Outline Get fill pattern

Syntax short GCSEditGetFillPattern(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Fill pattern

Details Gets the fill pattern.

File name gwin.h

296
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetInsertMode

gwin.h
Outline Set insert/overwrite mode

Syntax void GCSEditSetInsertMode(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
short nIsInsert
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) short nIsInsert : set insert/overwrite mode
TRUE : insert mode
FALSE : overwrite mode

Return value None

Details Sets the insert/overwrite mode.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetInsertMode

gwin.h
Outline Get insert/overwrite mode

Syntax short GCSEditGetInsertMode(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value TRUE : insert mode

FALSE : overwrite mode

Details Gets the insert/overwrite mode.

File name gwin.h

297
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetLineBrush

gwin.h
Outline Set line brush

Syntax short GCSEditSetLineBrush(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GBrush *pBrush,
unsigned long ulLine
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulLine : line No.
(i) GBrush *pBrush : brush structure

Return value None

Details Sets the brush for the specified line.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetLineBrush

gwin.h
Outline Get line brush

Syntax short GCSEditGetLineBrush(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GBrush *pBrush,
unsigned long ulLine
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulLine : line No.
(i) GBrush *pBrush : brush structure

Return value TRUE : processing succeeded

FALSE : processing failed

Details Gets the brush for the specified line.

File name gwin.h

298
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditSetLineTextColor

gwin.h
Outline Set line text display color

Syntax short GCSEditSetLineTextColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GColor gcLineColor,
unsigned long ulLine
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulLine : line No.
(i) GColor gcColor; : color code for text display color

Return value None

Details Sets the text display color for the specified line.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetLineTextColor

gwin.h
Outline Get line text display color

Syntax GColor GCSEditGetLineTextColor(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned long ulLine
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Color code for text display color for specified line

Details Gets the text display color for the specified line.

File name gwin.h

299
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditGetLength

gwin.h
Outline Get character length

Syntax unsigned long GCSEditGetLength(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Number of characters

Details Gets the current number of characters.

File name gwin.h

300
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditFind

gwin.h
Outline Search forward

Syntax short GCSEditFind(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszString,
unsigned long ulStartLine,
unsigned long ulStartIndex,
unsigned long *pulEditFindLine,
unsigned long *pulEditFindPos
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *pszString : character string for search
(i) unsigned long ulStartLine : starting line for search
(i) unsigned long ulStartIndex : starting position for search
(i) unsigned long *pulFindLine : search result line
(i) unsigned long *pulFindIndex : search result position

Return value FALSE : search failed

TRUE : search succeeded

Details Searchs the character string for search from the search starting position toward
the end. Returns the position of the character string found first.

File name gwin.h

301
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditReverseFind

gwin.h
Outline Search backward

Syntax short GCSEditReverseFind(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszString,
unsigned long ulStartLine,
unsigned long ulStartIndex,
unsigned long *pulFindLine,
unsigned long *pulFindPos
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *pszString : character string for search
(i) unsigned long ulStartLine : starting line for search
(i) unsigned long ulStartIndex : starting position for search
(i) unsigned long *pulFindLine : search results line
(i) unsigned long *pulFindIndex : search result position

Return value FALSE : search failed

TRUE : search succeeded

Details Searchs the character string for search from the search starting position toward
the beginning. Returns the position of the character string found first.

File name gwin.h

302
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditReplace

gwin.h
Outline Replace

Syntax short GCSEditReplace(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszString,
unsigned long ulStartLine,
unsigned long ulStartIndex,
unsigned long ulSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *pszString : replacement character string
(i) unsigned long ulStartLine : starting line for replacement
(i) unsigned long ulStartIndex : starting position for replacement
(i) unsigned long ulSize : replacement size

Return value FALSE : replacement failed

TRUE : replacement succeeded

Details Replaces a character string of the replacement size starting at the replacement
starting position.

File name gwin.h

303
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditReplaceAll

gwin.h
Outline Replace all

Syntax unsigned long GCSEditReplaceAll(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszReplace,
GTCHAR *pszFind
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *pszReplace : replacement character string
(i) GTCHAR *pszFind : character string for search

Return value Number of replacements

Details Searches the character string for search starting from the character string in the
buffer and replaces it with the replacement character string.

File name gwin.h

304
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditInsertString

gwin.h
Outline Insert character string

Syntax short GCSEditInsertString(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GTCHAR *pszString,
unsigned long ulLine,
unsigned long ulIndex
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) char *pszString : character string to be inserted
(i) unsigned long ulLine : line for insertion
(i) unsigned long ulIndex : insertion position

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Inserts character string.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditGetLineCount

gwin.h
Outline Get number of lines

Syntax unsigned long GCSEditGetLineCount(

GBaseObject *pEdit
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

Return value Number of lines

Details Gets the current number of lines.

File name gwin.h

305
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSEditGetBrush

gwin.h
Outline Get brush

Syntax short GCSEditGetBrush(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
GBrush *pBrush
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) GBrush *pBrush : brush structure

Return value TRUE : processing succeeded

FALSE : processing failed

Details Gets the brush.

File name gwin.h

GCSEditRemoveString

gwin.h
Outline Delete character string

Syntax short GCSEditRemoveString(

GBaseObject *pEdit,
unsigned long ulRemoveSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pEdit : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulRemoveSize : size of character string for deletion

Return value FALSE : processing failed

TRUE : processing succeeded

Details Deletes character string from the end.

File name gwin.h

306
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSHtmlbrowserSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSHtmlbrowserSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSHtmlbrowserGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSHtmlbrowserGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID setting.

File name gwin.h

307
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSHtmlbrowserSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSHtmlbrowserSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSHtmlbrowserGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSHtmlbrowserGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

Return value Font the resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

308
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSHtmlbrowserSetScrollBarWidth

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar width

Syntax void GCSHtmlbrowserSetScrollBarWidth(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser,
unsigned char ucScroolBarWidth
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucScrollBarWidth : scroll bar width

Return value None

Details Sets the scroll bar width.

After the scroll bar width is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSHtmlbrowserGetScrollBarWidth

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar width

Syntax unsigned char GCSHtmlbrowserGetScrollBarWidth(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

Return value Scroll bar width

Details Gets the scroll bar width.

File name gwin.h

309
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSHtmlbrowserSetTextColor

gwin.h
Outline Set text display color

Syntax void GCSHtmlbrowserSetTextColor(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for text display color

Return value None

Details Sets the text display color.

After the text display color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSHtmlbrowserGetTextColor

gwin.h
Outline Get text display color

Syntax GColor GCSHtmlbrowserGetTextColor(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

Return value Color code for text display color

Details Gets the text display color.

File name gwin.h

310
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSHtmlbrowserSetBackColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color

Syntax void GCSHtmlbrowserSetBackColor(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color

Return value None

Details Sets the background color.

After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSHtmlbrowserGetBackColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color

Syntax GColor GCSHtmlbrowserGetBackColor(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color

Details Gets the background color.

File name gwin.h

311
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSHtmlbrowserSetLinkColor

gwin.h
Outline Set link color

Syntax void GCSHtmlbrowserSetLinkColor(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for link color

Return value None

Details Sets the link color.

After the link color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSHtmlbrowserGetLinkColor

gwin.h
Outline Get link color

Syntax GColor GCSHtmlbrowserGetLinkColor(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

Return value Color code for link color

Details Gets the link color.

File name gwin.h

312
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSHtmlbrowserSetHtmlFileName

gwin.h
Outline Set HTML file name

Syntax void GCSHtmlbrowserSetHtmlFileName(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser,
GTCHAR *FileName
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *FileName : HTML file name

Return value None

Details Sets the HTML file name.

After the HTML file name is set, the read complete flag is cleared to 0 for
reading again.

File name gwin.h

GCSHtmlbrowserGetHtmlFileName

gwin.h
Outline Get HTML file name

Syntax GTCHAR* GCSHtmlbrowserGetHtmlFileName(

GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pHtmlBrowser : object for operation

Return value HTML file name

Details Gets the HTML file name.

File name gwin.h

313
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLabelSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSLabelSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pLabel,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pLabel : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSLabelGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSLabelGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pLabel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pLabel : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

314
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLabelSetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Set caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSLabelSetStringID(

GBaseObject *pLabel,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pLabel : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the caption character string resource ID.

After the caption character string resource ID is set, the control area is
registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSLabelGetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Get caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSLabelGetStringID(

GBaseObject *pLabel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pLabel : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the caption character string resource ID.

File name gwin.h

315
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSLabelSetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSLabelSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pLabel,
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pLabel : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information

Return value None

Details Sets pCaption in caption information.

After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSLabelGetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSLabelGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pLabel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pLabel : object for operation

Return value Pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information setting.

File name gwin.h

316
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSListSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pList,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSListGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID setting.

File name gwin.h

317
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSListSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pList,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSListGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

318
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSListSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pList,
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information

Return value None

Details Sets pCaption in caption information.

After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSListGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information setting.

File name gwin.h

319
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color during focus

Syntax void GCSListSetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pList,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the background color during focus.

After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color during focus

Syntax GColor GCSListGetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color during focus

Details Gets the background color during focus.

File name gwin.h

320
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetScrollButtonColor

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll button color

Syntax void GCSListSetScrollButtonColor(

GBaseObject *pList,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for scroll button color

Return value None

Details Sets the scroll button color.

After the scroll button color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetScrollButtonColor

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll button color

Syntax GColor GCSListGetScrollButtonColor(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Color code

Details Gets the scroll button color.

File name gwin.h

321
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetScrollBarColor

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar color

Syntax void GCSListSetScrollBarColor(

GBaseObject *pList,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for scroll bar color

Return value None

Details Sets the scroll bar color.

After the scroll bar color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetScrollBarColor

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar color

Syntax GColor GCSListGetScrollBarColor(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Color code

Details Gets the scroll bar color.

File name gwin.h

322
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetNormalColor

gwin.h
Outline Set normal background color

Syntax void GCSListSetNormalColor(

GBaseObject *pList,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for normal background color

Return value None

Details Sets the normal background color.

After the normal background color is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetNormalColor

gwin.h
Outline Get normal background color

Syntax GColor GCSListGetNormalColor(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Color code for normal background color

Details Gets the normal background color.

File name gwin.h

323
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetDisableColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color when disabled

Syntax void GCSListSetDisableColor(

GBaseObject *pList,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color when disabled

Return value None

Details Sets the background color when disabled.

After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetDisableColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color when disabled

Syntax GColor GCSListGetDisableColor(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color setting when disabled

Details Gets the background color when disabled.

File name gwin.h

324
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetScrollBarWidth

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar width

Syntax void GCSListSetScrollBarWidth(

GBaseObject *pList,
unsigned char ucScroolBarWidth
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucScrollBarWidth : scroll bar width

Return value None

Details Sets the scroll bar width.

After the scroll bar width is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetScrollBarWidth

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar width

Syntax unsigned char GCSListGetScrollBarWidth(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Scroll bar width

Details Gets the scroll bar width.

File name gwin.h

325
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetSelectBarColor

gwin.h
Outline Set selection bar color

Syntax void GCSListSetSelectBarColor(

GBaseObject *pList,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for selection bar color

Return value None

Details Sets the selection bar color.

After the selection bar color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetSelectBarColor

gwin.h
Outline Get selection bar color

Syntax GColor GCSListGetSelectBarColor(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Color code for selection bar

Details Gets the selection bar color.

File name gwin.h

326
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListSetMaxListLines

gwin.h
Outline Set maximum number of lines in list

Syntax void GCSListSetMaxListLines(

GBaseObject *pList,
unsigned short usMaxListLines
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usMaxListLines : maximum number 0 to 32767

Return value None

Details Sets the maximum number of lines for list control.

The range of settings is 0 to 32767.
When the maximum number of lines for display that is set is less than the
number of lines in a particular list already registered, the character strings in the
list that are over the setting are deleted.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetMaxListLines

gwin.h
Outline Get maximum number of lines in list

Syntax unsigned short GCSListGetMaxListLines(

GBaseObject * pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Maximum number of lines in list

Details Gets the maximum number of lines for list control.

File name gwin.h

327
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListAddString

gwin.h
Outline Add list character string

Syntax short GCSListAddString(

GBaseObject *pList,
GTCHAR *pszString
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) char *pszString : character string to be added

Return value -1 : addition failed

0 or more : line added

Details Adds a character string to the end of a list.

File name gwin.h

GCSListGetListString

gwin.h
Outline Get list character string

Syntax short GCSListGetListString(

GBaseObject *pList,
short nIndex,
GTCHAR *pszString,
short nLength
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : line No. to be acquired
(o) char* pszString : buffer storing the acquired character string
(i) short nLength : buffer size

Return value FALSE : acquisition failed

TRUE : acquisition succeeded

Details Gets the character string for the specified line in a list.

File name gwin.h

328
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListRemoveAllStrings

gwin.h
Outline Delete all list character strings

Syntax void GCSListRemoveAllStrings(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value None

Details Deletes all the character strings in a list.

File name gwin.h

GCSListSetCurrentSelect

gwin.h
Outline Set selected line

Syntax short GCSListSetCurrentSelect(

GBaseObject *pList,
long nSel
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) long nSel : set selected line
-1 : no selected line
0 or more : specify selected line

Return value FALSE : setting failed (illegal setting)

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the selected line in a list.

When -1 is specified, a selection is not made.
When the maximum number of lines is set, FALSE is returned for the return
value.

File name gwin.h

329
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListGetCurrentSelect

gwin.h
Outline Get selected line

Syntax long GCSListGetCurrentSelect(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value 0 or more : current selected line

-1 : no selection

Details Gets the selected line in a list.

File name gwin.h

GCSListSetVisibleScrollBarStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar display/non-display status

Syntax void GCSListSetVisibleScrollBarStatus(

GBaseObject *pList,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : display/non-display status
FALSE : non-display
TRUE : display

Return value None

Details Sets the display/non-display status for the scroll bar.

When switching the display/non-display, the object area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

330
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListGetVisibleScrollBarStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar display/non-display status

Syntax short GCSListGetVisibleScrollBarStatus(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value FALSE : non-display

TRUE : display

Details Gets the display/non-display status for the scroll bar.

File name gwin.h

GCSListSetEnableScrollBarStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar controllable or not controllable status

Syntax void GCSListSetEnableScrollBarStatus(

GBaseObject *pList,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : controllable or not controllable status
FALSE : not controllable
TRUE : controllable

Return value None

Details Sets the controllable or not controllable status for the scroll bar.
Controllability with mouse input or key input is determined according to this flag.

File name gwin.h

331
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListGetEnableScrollBarStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar controllable or not controllable status

Syntax short GCSListGetEnableScrollBarStatus(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value FALSE : not controllable

TRUE : controllable

Details Gets the controllable or not controllable status for the scroll bar.

File name gwin.h

GCSListSetTopLine

gwin.h
Outline Set list top line

Syntax void GCSListSetTopLine(

GBaseObject *pList,
long lIndex
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) long lIndex : top line No.

Return value None

Details Changes the top line of the list to 1Position.

When a value outside of the range is set, it is changed to the smallest line or the
largest line.

File name gwin.h

332
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListGetTopLine

gwin.h
Outline Get list top line

Syntax long GCSListGetTopLine(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Top line No.

Details Gets the current first line in a list.

File name gwin.h

GCSListInsertString

gwin.h
Outline Insert list character string

Syntax short GCSListInsertString(

GBaseObject *pList,
short nIndex,
GTCHAR *pszString
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : line No. for insertion (-1: add at the end)
(i) char *pszString : character string to be added

Return value -1 : addition failed

0 or more : line added

Details Adds a character string to the specified line in a list.

Specifies a line No. to be added to nIndex.
When -1 is specified in nIndex, it is added to the end of the list.
When the line specified by nIndex does not exist, it is an addition failure.

File name gwin.h

333
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSListGetLineCount

gwin.h
Outline Get number of lines in list

Syntax short GCSListGetLineCount(

GBaseObject *pList
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

Return value Current number of lines in list

Details Gets the current number of lines in a list.

File name gwin.h

GCSListRemoveString

gwin.h
Outline Delete list character string

Syntax short GCSListRemoveString(

GBaseObject *pList,
short nIndex
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pList : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : line No. for deletion

Return value FALSE : deletion failed

TRUE : deletion succeeded

Details Deletes the character string for the specified line in a list.

File name gwin.h

334
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSProgressbarSetBackGroundDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set background design

Syntax void GCSProgressbarSetBackGroundDesign(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

(i) GDesign* pDesign : design

Return value None

Details Sets the background design for the progress bar.

After the background design is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSProgressbarGetBackGroundDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get background design

Syntax GDesign* GCSProgressbarGetBackGroundDesign(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

Return value Pointer to design

Details Gets the background design for the progress bar.

File name gwin.h

335
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSProgressbarSetBarDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set bar design

Syntax void GCSProgressbarSetBarDesign(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

(i) GDesign* pDesign : design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for the progress bar.

After the bar design is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSProgressbarGetBarDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get bar design

Syntax GDesign* GCSProgressbarGetBarDesign(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

Return value Pointer to design

Details Gets the design for the progress bar.

File name gwin.h

336
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSProgressbarSetRange

gwin.h
Outline Set progress bar range

Syntax void GCSProgressbarSetRange(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar,
short nMin,
short nMax
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

(i) short lMin : minimum value
(i) short lMax : maximum value

Return value None

Details Sets the range for the progress bar.

When the smallest value and largest value settings are inverted, they are
reversed.

File name gwin.h

GCSProgressbarGetRange

gwin.h
Outline Get progress bar range

Syntax void GCSProgressbarGetRange(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar,
short *pMin,
short *pMax
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

(o) short *lMin : variable storing smallest value
(o) short *lMax : variable storing largest value

Return value None

Details Gets the range for the progress bar.

File name gwin.h

337
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSProgressbarSetDirection

gwin.h
Outline Set fill direction

Syntax void GCSProgressbarSetDirection(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar,
unsigned char ucDirection
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucDirection : fill direction

Return value None

Details Sets the fill direction for the progress bar.

One of the followings is set for ucDirection:
GPROG_DIR_LEFT2RIGHT : left to right
GPROG_DIR_RIGHT2LEFT : right to left
GPROG_DIR_TOP2BOTTOM : top to bottom
GPROG_DIR_BOTTOM2TOP : bottom to top
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.

File name gwin.h

338
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSProgressbarGetDirection

gwin.h
Outline Get fill direction

Syntax unsigned char GCSProgressbarGetDirection(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

Return value GPROG_DIR_LEFT2RIGHT : left to right

GPROG_DIR_RIGHT2LEFT : right to left
GPROG_DIR_TOP2BOTTOM : top to bottom
GPROG_DIR_BOTTOM2TOP : bottom to top
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the fill direction setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSProgressbarGetValue

gwin.h
Outline Get current progress bar value

Syntax short GCSProgressbarGetValue(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

Return value Current value

Details Gets the current value for the progress bar.

File name gwin.h

339
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSProgressbarSetValue

gwin.h
Outline Set current progress bar value

Syntax void GCSProgressbarSetValue(

GBaseObject *pProgressBar,
long nValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pProgressBar : object for operation

(i) long lValue : current value

Return value None

Details Sets the current value for the progress bar.

The permissible range for the setting is the range specified by SetRange, and
values outside of the range become the maximum value or the minimum value.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

340
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSRadiobuttonGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

341
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSRadiobuttonGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Set caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetStringID(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the caption character string resource ID.

After the caption character string resource ID is set, the control area is
registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

342
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Get caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSRadiobuttonGetStringID(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the caption character string resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information

Return value None

Details Sets the pCaption in caption information.

All except character color are disabled.
After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

343
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSRadiobuttonGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information setting.

All settings except character color are disabled.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Set effect during focus

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
unsigned char ucFocusEffect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucFocusEffect : effect during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the effect during focus.

One of the following values is set for ucFocusEffect:
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change
GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
After the effect is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

344
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Get effect during focus

Syntax unsigned char GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject * pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change

GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the effect used during focus.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set object status

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetStatus(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
unsigned char ucStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucStatus : set object status

Return value None

Details Sets the GCRadioButton object status.

One of the following values is set for ucStatus:
GRADIO_STATE_OFF : OFF status
GRADIO_STATE_ON : ON status
GRADIO_STATE_OFFSELECT : OFF selection status
When GRADIO_STATE_ON is set, other controls within the same screen are
set to OFF.

File name gwin.h

345
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get object status

Syntax unsigned char GCSRadiobuttonGetStatus(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value GRADIO_STATE_OFF : OFF status

GRADIO_STATE_ON : ON status
GRADIO_STATE_OFFSELECT : OFF selection status
Besides the above : undefined status

Details Gets the GCRadioButton object status.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxSize

gwin.h
Outline Set box size

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxSize(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
unsigned short ucBoxSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short ucBoxSize : check box size

Return value None

Details Sets the box size.

After the box size is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

346
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxSize

gwin.h
Outline Get box size

Syntax unsigned short GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxSize(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Box size

Details Gets the box size settings.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Set box color

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : box color

Return value None

Details Sets the box color.

After the box color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

347
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Get box color

Syntax GColor GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Box color

Details Gets the box color.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color during focus

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : background color during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the background color when the effect during focus is
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR.
After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

348
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color during focus

Syntax GColor GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Background color during focus

Details Gets the background color when the effect during focus is
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableCaptionColor

gwin.h
Outline Set character color when disabled

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableCaptionColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : character color when disabled

Return value None

Details Sets the character color during disabled control.

After the character color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

349
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableCaptionColor

gwin.h
Outline Get character color when diabled

Syntax GColor GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableCaptionColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Character color when disabled

Details Gets the character color during disabled control.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Set box color when disabled

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : box color

Return value None

Details Sets the box color during disabled control.

After the box color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

350
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableBoxColor

gwin.h
Outline Get box color when disabled

Syntax GColor GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableBoxColor(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Box color when disabled

Details Gets the box color during disabled control.

File name gwin.h

GCSRadiobuttonSetRadioGroup

gwin.h
Outline Set radio group No.

Syntax void GCSRadiobuttonSetRadioGroup(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton,
unsigned short usRadioGroup
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

unsigned short usRadioGroup : radio group No.

Return value None

Details Sets the group No. for radio buttons.

The radio button control in the screen having the same group No. carries out an
exclusion operation.

File name gwin.h

351
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSRadiobuttonGetRadioGroup

gwin.h
Outline Get radio group No.

Syntax unsigned short GCSRadiobuttonGetRadioGroup(

GBaseObject *pRadioButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pRadioButton : object for operation

Return value Radio group No.

Details Gets the group No. for radio buttons.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetDisplay

gwin.h
Outline Set display type

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned char ucDisplay
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucDisplay : display type

Return value None

Details Sets the display type.

One of the following values is set for ucDisplay:
GSBAR_DISP_NORMAL : normal display
GSBAR_DISP_IMAGE : image display
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.
After the display type is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

352
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetDisplay

gwin.h
Outline Get display type

Syntax unsigned char GCSScrollbarexGetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value GSBAR_DISP_NORMAL : normal display

GSBAR_DISP_IMAGE : image display
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the display type setting.

When a setting outside the range is made, that setting value is returned.

File name gwin.h

353
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexSetDirection

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar direction

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetDirection(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned char ucDirection
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucDirection : scroll bar direction

Return value None

Details Sets the scroll bar direction.

One of the following values is set for ucDisplay:
GSBAR_VERTICAL : vertical direction
GSBAR_HORIZONTAL : horizontal direction
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.
After the scroll bar direction is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

354
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetDirection

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar direction

Syntax unsigned char GCSScrollbarexGetDirection(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value GSBAR_VERTICAL : vertical direction

GSBAR_HORIZONTAL : horizontal direction
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the scroll bar direction setting.

When a setting outside the range is made, that setting value is returned.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetPageSize

gwin.h
Outline Set page size

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetPageSize(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned long ulPageSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulPageSize : page size

Return value None

Details Sets the page size.

After the page size is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

355
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetPageSize

gwin.h
Outline Get page size

Syntax unsigned long GCSScrollbarexGetPageSize(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Page size

Details Gets the page size.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetRange

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar range

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetRange(

GBaseObject *pScrollBar
long nMin
long nMax
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBar : object for operation

(i) long lMin : minimum value
(i) long lMax : maximum value

Return value None

Details Sets the range for the scroll bar.

When the smallest value and largest value settings are inverted, they are
reversed.

File name gwin.h

356
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetRange

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar range

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexGetRange(

GBaseObject *pScrollBar
long* pMin
long* pMax
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBar : object for operation

(i) long *pMin : pointer to variable storing smallest value
(i) long *pMax : pointer to variable storing largest value

Return value None

Details Gets the range for the scroll bar.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetScrollArrowColor

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll arrow color

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetScrollArrowColor(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for scroll arrow color

Return value None

Details Sets the scroll bar arrow color.

After the scroll bar arrow color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

357
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetScrollArrowColor

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll arrow color

Syntax GColor GCSScrollbarexGetScrollArrowColor(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Color code

Details Gets the scroll bar arrow color.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetScrollPosition

gwin.h
Outline Set scroll bar current position

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetScrollPosition(

GBaseObject *pScrollBar
long lPosition
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBar : object for operation

(i) long lPosition : current position

Return value None

Details Sets the scroll bar current position.

When a value outside of the maximum/minimum value is set, that setting value
is set to maximum/minimum value.

File name gwin.h

358
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetScrollPosition

gwin.h
Outline Get scroll bar current position

Syntax long GCSScrollbarexGetScrollPosition(

GBaseObject *pScrollBar
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBar : object for operation

Return value Current position

Details Gets the scroll bar current position.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOnImgID

gwin.h
Outline Set design (upper) resource ID when button is ON

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOnImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : design (upper) resource ID when button is ON

Return value None

Details Sets the design (upper) resource ID when the button is ON.
After the design resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

359
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOffImgID

gwin.h
Outline Set design (upper) resource ID when button is OFF

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOffImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : design (upper) resource ID when button is
OFF

Return value None

Details Sets the design (upper) resource ID when the button is OFF.
After the design resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOnImgID

gwin.h
Outline Get design (upper) resource ID when button is ON

Syntax unsigned short GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOnImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Design (upper) resource ID when button is ON

Details Gets the design (upper) resource ID setting when the button is ON.

File name gwin.h

360
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOffImgID

gwin.h
Outline Get design (upper) resource ID when button is OFF

Syntax unsigned short GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOffImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Design (upper) resource ID when button is OFF

Details Gets the design (upper) resource ID setting when the button is OFF.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOnImgID

gwin.h
Outline Set design (lower) resource ID when button is ON

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOnImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : design (lower) resource ID when button is ON

Return value None

Details Sets the design (lower) resource ID when the button is ON.
After the design resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

361
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOffImgID

gwin.h
Outline Set design (lower) resource ID when button is OFF

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOffImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : design (lower) resource ID when button is
OFF

Return value None

Details Sets the design (lower) resource ID when the button is OFF.
After the design resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOnImgID

gwin.h
Outline Get design (lower) resource ID when button is ON

Syntax unsigned short GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOnImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Design (lower) resource ID when button is ON

Details Gets the design (lower) resource ID setting when the button is ON.

File name gwin.h

362
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOffImgID

gwin.h
Outline Get design (lower) resource ID when button is OFF

Syntax unsigned short GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOffImgID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Design (lower) resource ID when button is OFF

Details Gets the design (lower) resource ID setting when the button is OFF.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetBackGroundColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetBackGroundColor(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color

Return value None

Details Sets the background color.

After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

363
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetBackGroundColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color

Syntax GColor GCSScrollbarexGetBackGroundColor(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Color code

Details Gets the background color.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetOutLineBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set outline 3D border

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetOutLineBorderID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the outline 3D border.

File name gwin.h

364
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetOutLineBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get outline 3D border

Syntax unsigned short GCSScrollbarexGetOutLineBorderID(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Outline 3D border resource ID

Details Gets outline 3D border resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetPinchWidth

gwin.h
Outline Set pinch width

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetPinchWidth(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
unsigned short nWidth
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) unsigned short nWidth : pinch width

Return value None

Details Sets the pinch width.

File name gwin.h

365
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetPinchWidth

gwin.h
Outline Get pinch width

Syntax unsigned short GCSScrollbarexGetPinchWidth(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Pinch width

Details Gets the pinch width.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetPinchColor

gwin.h
Outline Set pinch color

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetPinchColor(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : pinch color

Return value None

Details Sets the pinch color.

File name gwin.h

366
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetPinchColor

gwin.h
Outline Get pinch color

Syntax GColor GCSScrollbarexGetPinchColor(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value Pinch color

Details Gets the pinch color.

File name gwin.h

GCSScrollbarexSetBarEnableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set bar display/non-display

Syntax void GCSScrollbarexSetBarEnableStatus(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx,
short nStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

(i) short nStatus : scroll bar display/non-display status
TRUE : display
FALSE : non-display

Return value None

Details Sets the display/non-display for the bar.

File name gwin.h

367
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSScrollbarexGetBarEnableStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get bar display/non-display

Syntax short GCSScrollbarexGetBarEnableStatus(

GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pScrollBarEx : object for operation

Return value TRUE : display

FALSE : non-display

Details Gets the display/non-display setting for the bar.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

368
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSTextboxGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

369
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSTextboxGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : caption information

Return value None

Details Sets the pCaption in caption information.

After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

370
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSTextboxGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Set effect during focus

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
unsigned char ucFocusEffect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucFocusEffect : effect during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the effect during focus.

One of the following values is set for ucFocusEffect:
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change
GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
After the effect is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

371
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetFocusEffect

gwin.h
Outline Get effect during focus

Syntax unsigned char GCSTextboxGetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change

GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the effect used during focus.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color during focus

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the background color during focus.

After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

372
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetFocusColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color during focus

Syntax GColor GCSTextboxGetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color during focus

Details Gets the background color during focus.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetNormalColor

gwin.h
Outline Set normal background color

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetNormalColor(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for normal background color

Return value None

Details Sets the normal background color.

After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

373
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetNormalColor

gwin.h
Outline Get normal background color

Syntax GColor GCSTextboxGetNormalColor(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Color code for normal background color

Details Gets the normal background color.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetDisableColor

gwin.h
Outline Set background color when disabled

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetDisableColor(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color when disabled

Return value None

Details Sets the background color when disabled.

After the background color is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

374
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetDisableColor

gwin.h
Outline Get background color when disabled

Syntax GColor GCSTextboxGetDisableColor(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color setting when disabled

Details Gets the background color when disabled.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetTextType

gwin.h
Outline Set character string type

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetTextType(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
unsigned char ucType
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucType : character string type

Return value None

Details Sets the character string type.

One of the following values is set for ucType:
GTEXT_TYPE_STRING : character string
GTEXT_TYPE_SHORT : short value
GTEXT_TYPE_USHORT : unsigned short value
GTEXT_TYPE_LONG : long value
GTEXT_TYPE_ULONG : unsigned long value
GTEXT_TYPE_FLOAT : float value

File name gwin.h

375
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetTextType

gwin.h
Outline Get character string type

Syntax unsigned char GCSTextboxGetTextType(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value GTEXT_TYPE_STRING : character string

GTEXT_TYPE_SHORT : short value
GTEXT_TYPE_USHORT : unsigned short value
GTEXT_TYPE_LONG : long value
GTEXT_TYPE_ULONG : unsigned long value
GTEXT_TYPE_FLOAT : float value
Besides the above : illegal setting

Details Gets the display character string type.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetFormatID

gwin.h
Outline Set character string display format resource ID

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetFormatID(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : character string resource ID as display format

Return value None

Details Sets the character string resource ID used as the format when display in a text
box.
After the character string resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

376
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetFormatID

gwin.h
Outline Get character string display format resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSTextboxGetFormatID(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox :object for operation

Return value Character string resource ID

Details Gets the character string resource ID used as the display format.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetPasswordStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set password display status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetPasswordStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : password display status
FALSE : normal display status
TRUE : password display status

Return value None

Details Sets whether the password will be displayed for text boxes or not.
After the password display status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gwin.h

377
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetPasswordStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get password display status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetPasswordStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : normal display status

TRUE : password display status

Details Gets whether the test box display status is normal display status or the
password display status.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetCommaStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set comma display status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetCommaStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : comma display status
FALSE : normal display status
TRUE : comma display status

Return value None

Details Sets whether commas will be displayed for text boxes or not.
After the comma display status is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

378
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetCommaStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get comma display status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetCommaStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : normal display status

TRUE : comma display status

Details Gets the setting as to whether the test box display status is normal display
status or the comma display status.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputNumberStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set numerical input disabled status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputNumberStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : number input status
FALSE : input enabled
TRUE : input disabled

Return value None

Details Sets whether numerical input will be rejected for text boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

379
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputNumberStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get numerical input disabled status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputNumberStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : input enabled

TRUE : input disabled

Details Gets the setting as to whether numerical input will be rejected for text boxes or
not.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set one-byte lower case character input disabled status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : one-byte lower case character input status
FALSE : input enabled
TRUE : input disabled

Return value None

Details Sets whether one-byte lower case character input will be rejected for text boxes
or not.

File name gwin.h

380
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get one-byte lower case character input disabled status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : input enabled

TRUE : input disabled

Details Gets the setting as to whether one-byte lower case character input will be
rejected for text boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set one-byte upper case character input disabled status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : one-byte upper case character input status
FALSE : input enabled
TRUE : input disabled

Return value None

Details Sets whether one-byte upper case character input will be rejected for text
boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

381
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get one-byte upper case character input disabled status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : input enabled

TRUE : input disabled

Details Gets whether one-byte upper case character input will be rejected for text
boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set one-byte symbol input disabled status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : one-byte symbol input status
FALSE : input enabled
TRUE : input disabled

Return value None

Details Sets whether one-byte symbol input will be rejected for text boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

382
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get one-byte symbol input disabld status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : input enabled

TRUE : input disabled

Details Gets whether one-byte symbol input will be rejected for text boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set two-byte character input disabled status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : two-byte character input status
FALSE : input enabled
TRUE : input disabled

Return value None

Details Sets whether two-byte character input will be rejected for text boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

383
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get two-byte character input disabled status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : input enabled

TRUE : input disabled

Details Gets setting as to whether two-byte character input will be rejected for text
boxes or not.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set maximum value check status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : setting for maximum value check status
FALSE : check disabled
TRUE : check enabled

Return value None

Details Sets whether the maximum value will be checked with SetValue and GetValue
for text boxes.

File name gwin.h

384
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetCheckMaxStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get maximum value check status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetCheckMaxStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : check disabled

TRUE : check enabled

Details Gets the setting as to whether the maximum value will be checked with
SetValue and GetValue from text boxes.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetCheckMinStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set minimum value check status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetCheckMinStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : setting for minimum value check status
FALSE : check disabled
TRUE : check enabled

Return value None

Details Sets whether the maximum value will be checked with SetValue and GetValue
for text boxes.

File name gwin.h

385
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetCheckMinStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get minimum value check status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetCheckMinStatus(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : check disabled

TRUE : check enabled

Details Gets the setting as to whether the minimum value will be checked with
SetValue and GetValue from text boxes.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetMaxGValue

gwin.h
Outline Set maximum value

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetMaxGValue(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GValue gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue gvValue : maximum value

Return value None

Details Sets the maximum value when checking the maximum value with SetValue and
GetValue for text boxes.

File name gwin.h

386
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetMaxGValue

gwin.h
Outline Get maximum value

Syntax GValue GCSTextboxGetMaxGValue(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Maximum value (GValue)

Details Gets the maximum value when checking the maximum value for SetValue and
GetValue from text boxes.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetMinGValue

gwin.h
Outline Set minimum value

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetMinGValue(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GValue gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue gvValue : minimum value

Return value None

Details Sets the minimum value when checking the minimum value with SetValue and
GetValue for text boxes.

File name gwin.h

387
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetMinGValue

gwin.h
Outline Get minimum value

Syntax GValue GCSTextboxGetMinGValue(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Minimum value (GValue)

Details Gets the minimum value when checking the minimum value with SetValue and
GetValue from text boxes.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxSetString

gwin.h
Outline Set display character string

Syntax short GCSTextboxSetString(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
const GTCHAR *pString
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) const char *pString : display character string

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the display character string.

File name gwin.h

388
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetString

gwin.h
Outline Get display character string

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetString(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GTCHAR *pString,
long lMaxCount
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(o) char *pString : buffer storing display character string
(i) long lMaxCount : buffer size

Return value FALSE : acquisition failed

TRUE : acquisition succeeded

Details Stores the display character string in pString.

File name gwin.h

389
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxSetGValue

gwin.h
Outline Set display value

Syntax short GCSTextboxSetGValue(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GValue gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue gvValue : setting value

Return value 0 : normal value

GTEXT_ERROR_UNDER_MIN_LIMIT : less than minimum value
GTEXT_ERROR_OVER_MAX_LIMIT : greater than maximum value

Details Sets the value displayed in a text box.

Numbers are converted to character strings according to the display format.
At this time, the maximum value and minimum value are checked, and if it is
outside of the range, an error is returned in the return value.
Error checks are performed by:
GTEXT_TYPE_SHORT
GTEXT_TYPE_USHORT
GTEXT_TYPE_LONG

File name gwin.h

390
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxGetGValue

gwin.h
Outline Get display value

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetGValue(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
GValue *gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue *gvValue : GValue variable storing the value

Return value 0 : normal value

GTEXT_ERROR_UNDER_MIN_LIMIT : less than minimum value
GTEXT_ERROR_OVER_MAX_LIMIT : greater than maximum value

Details Gets the value displayed in a text box.

Character strings are converted to numbers according to the display format.
At this time, the maximum value and minimum value are checked, and if it is
outside of the range, an error is returned in the return value.
Error checks are performed by:
GTEXT_TYPE_SHORT
GTEXT_TYPE_USHORT

File name gwin.h

391
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxSetStringBuffer

gwin.h
Outline Set display buffer

Syntax short GCSTextboxSetStringBuffer(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
unsigned long ulBufferSize,
GTCHAR *pStringBuffer
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulBufferSize : buffer size
(i) char *pStringBuffer : character string buffer

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the display buffer.

Allocates memory internally when pStringBuffer is NULL. When a character
string buffer is specified, that buffer is set.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxGetStringBuffer

gwin.h
Outline Get display buffer

Syntax GTCHAR* GCSTextboxGetStringBuffer(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
unsigned long *ulBufferSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned long *ulBufferSize : variable storing the buffer size

Return value Display buffer address

Details Gets the display buffer.

File name gwin.h

392
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSTextboxSetBackGroundPattern

gwin.h
Outline Set background fill status

Syntax void GCSTextboxSetBackGroundPattern(

GBaseObject *pTextBox,
short nBackGroundPattern
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

(i) short nBackGroundPattern : background fill status

Return value None

Details Sets the background color fill status.

NO_DRAW and FILL_BACK_COLOR are the corresponding fill statuses.

File name gwin.h

GCSTextboxGetBackGroundPattern

gwin.h
Outline Get background fill status

Syntax short GCSTextboxGetBackGroundPattern(

GBaseObject *pTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pTextBox : object for operation

Return value Background fill status

NO_DRAW : no fill
FILL_BACK_COLOR : background fill

Details Sets the background color fill status.

NO_DRAW and FILL_BACK_COLOR are the corresponding fill statuses.

File name gwin.h

393
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLInit

gwin.h
Outline Initialization

Syntax void GCSBWLInit(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value None

Details Initialization

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLAdd

gwin.h
Outline Addition

Syntax short GCSBWLAdd(

HGBWL hList,
GBaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(i) GbaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow : object to be added

Return value FALSE : addition failed

TRUE : addition succeeded

Details Addition

File name gwin.h

394
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLRemove

gwin.h
Outline Deletion

Syntax short GCSBWLRemove(

HGBWL hList,
GBaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(i) GBaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow : object to be deleted

Return value FALSE : deletion failed

TRUE : deletion succeeded

Details Deletion

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLClear

gwin.h
Outline All clear

Syntax void GCSBWLClear(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value None

Details Clears all.

File name gwin.h

395
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLMoveFirst

gwin.h
Outline Move to first

Syntax short GCSBWLMoveFirst(

HGBWL hList,
GBaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(i) GBaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow : object to be moved

Return value FALSE : specified object does not exist

TRUE : move succeeded

Details Moves to the first.

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLMoveLast

gwin.h
Outline Move to last

Syntax short GCSBWLMoveLast(

HGBWL hList,
GBaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(i) GbaseObject *pgbwBaseWindow : object to be moved

Return value FALSE : specified object does not exist

TRUE : move succeeded

Details Moves to the last.

File name gwin.h

396
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLGetFirst

gwin.h
Outline Get first object

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSBWLGetFirst(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value NULL : object does not exist

Other than NULL : first object

Details Gets the first object.

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLGetLast

gwin.h
Outline Get last object

Syntax GBaseObject* GCSBWLGetLast(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList :list handle

Return value NULL : object does not exist

Other than NULL : last object

Details Gets the last object.

File name gwin.h

397
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLFindListItem

gwin.h
Outline Find object

Syntax short GCSBWLFindListItem(

HGBWL hList,
GBaseObject *pBaseWindow
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(i) GbaseObject *pBaseWindow : object being searched for

Return value FALSE : none

TRUE : present

Details Finds the object.

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLFindFirstItem

gwin.h
Outline Move search position to first item

Syntax short GCSBWLFindFirstItem(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value FALSE : move failed

TRUE : move succeeded

Details Moves the search to the first item.

File name gwin.h

398
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLFindNextItem

gwin.h
Outline Acquire object at search position and move search position to next

Syntax short GCSBWLFindNextItem(

HGBWL hList,
GBaseObject **pgbwBaseWindow
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(o) GBaseObject **pgbwBaseWindow : store object to be acquired

Return value FALSE : move failed

TRUE : move succeeded

Details Gets the object at search position and moves search position to the next.

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLFindLastItem

gwin.h
Outline Move search position to last item

Syntax short GCSBWLFindLastItem(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value FALSE : move failed

TRUE : move succeeded

Details Moves the search position to the last item.

File name gwin.h

399
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLFindPrevItem

gwin.h
Outline Acquire object at search position and move search position to previous

Syntax short GCSBWLFindPrevItem(

HGBWL hList,
GBaseObject **pgbwBaseWindow
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(o) GBaseObject **pgbwBaseWindow : store object to be acquired

Return value FALSE : move failed

TRUE : move succeeded

Details Gets the object at search position and moves search position to the previous.

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLCount

gwin.h
Outline Get number of list items

Syntax long GCSBWLCount(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value Number of list items

Details Gets the number of list items.

File name gwin.h

400
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLSetItemPosition

gwin.h
Outline Set current list search position

Syntax void GCSBWLSetItemPosition(

HGBWL hList,
void *pvItemPosition
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

(i) void *pvItemPosition : list search position

Return value None

Details Sets the current list search position.

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLGetItemPosition

gwin.h
Outline Get current list search position

Syntax void* GCSBWLGetItemPosition(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value Pointer showing current list search position

Details Gets the current list search position.

File name gwin.h

401
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSBWLNew

gwin.h
Outline Create list object

Syntax HGBWL GCSBWLNew()

Argument None

Return value List handle

Details Creates the list object.

File name gwin.h

GCSBWLDelete

gwin.h
Outline Delete list object

Syntax void GCSBWLDelete(

HGBWL hList
)

Argument (i) HGBWL hList : list handle

Return value None

Details Deletes the list object.

File name gwin.h

402
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSWDCGetHGDRAW

gwin.h
Outline Get drawing handle

Syntax HGDRAW GCSWDCGetHGDRAW(

HWDC hWDC
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

Return value None

Details Gets the drawing handle (HGDRAW).

File name gwin.h

GCSWDCOffsetOrigin

gwin.h
Outline Move position of origin

Syntax void GCSWDCOffsetOrigin(

HWDC hWDC,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate offset amount
(i) short nY : Y coordinate offset amount

Return value None

Details Moves the position of the origin.

File name gwin.h

403
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSWDCSetClipRect

gwin.h
Outline Define clipping area

Syntax void GCSWDCSetClipRect(

HWDC hWDC,
GRect *pClip
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

(i) GRect *pClip : clipping area

Return value None

Details Defines clipping area as pClip.

File name gwin.h

GCSWDCGetClipRect

gwin.h
Outline Get clipping area

Syntax void GCSWDCGetClipRect(

HWDC hWDC,
GRect *pClip
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

(i) GRect *pClip : clipping area

Return value None

Details Gets the clipping area.

File name gwin.h

404
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSWDCInceptClipRect

gwin.h
Outline Define clipping for the part overlapping the current clipping area

Syntax short GCSWDCInceptClipRect(

HWDC hWDC,
GRect *pClip,
GRect *pOldClip
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

(i) GRect *pClip : clipping area
(o) GRect *pOldClip : previous clipping area

Return value FALSE : no clipping area

TRUE : clipping area present

Details Defines the clipping area as the part overlapping between the current clipping
area and pClip.

File name gwin.h

GCSWDCBeginDraw

gwin.h
Outline Start drawing process

Syntax void GCSWDCBeginDraw(

HWDC hWDC,
GRect *pRefreshRect
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

(i) GRect *pRefreshRect : area for redrawing

Return value None

Details Starts the drawing process.

File name gwin.h

405
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSWDCEndDraw

gwin.h
Outline End drawing process

Syntax void GCSWDCEndDraw(

HWDC hWDC
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

Return value None

Details Ends the drawing process.

File name gwin.h

GCSWDCNew

gwin.h
Outline Create device context

Syntax HWDC GCSWDCNew(

HGDRAW hDraw
)

Argument (i) HGDRAW hDraw : drawing handle

Return value Device context

Null : creation failed
Other than Null : device context created

Details Creates the device context.

File name gwin.h

406
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSWDCDelete

gwin.h
Outline Delete device context

Syntax void GCSWDCDelete(

HWDC hWDC
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

Return value None

Details Deletes the device context.

File name gwin.h

GCSWDCSetOrigin

gwin.h
Outline Set position of origin

Syntax void GCSWDCSetOrigin(

HWDC hWDC,
short nX,
short nY
)

Argument (i) HWDC hWDC : device context handle

(i) short nX : X coordinate
(i) short nY : Y coordinate

Return value None

Details Sets the position of the origin.

File name gwin.h

407
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetDisplay

gwin.h
Outline Set picture display

Syntax void GCSPictureSetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pPicture
unsigned char ucDisplay
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucDisplay : picture display

Return value None

Details Sets the picture display.

One of the following values is set for ucDisplay:
GPCTR_DISP_RECT : rectangle display
GPCTR_DISP_OVAL : (oval) round shape display
GPCTR_DISP_IMAGE : image display
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.

File name gwin.h

408
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureGetDisplay

gwin.h
Outline Get picture display

Syntax unsigned char GCSPictureGetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value GPCTR_DISP_RECT : rectangle display

GPCTR_DISP_OVAL : (oval) round shape display
GPCTR_DISP_IMAGE : image display
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the picture display setting.

When a setting outside the range is made, that setting value is returned.

File name gwin.h

409
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSPictureSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pPicture
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSPictureGetBorderID

gwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSPictureGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID.

File name gwin.h

410
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSPictureSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pPicture
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSPictureGetFontID

gwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSPictureGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gwin.h

411
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Set caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSPictureSetStringID(

GBaseObject *pPicture
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID :caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the caption character string resource ID.

After the caption character string resource ID is set, the control area is
registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSPictureGetStringID

gwin.h
Outline Get caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSPictureGetStringID(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the caption character string resource ID.

File name gwin.h

412
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSPictureSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pPicture
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : pointer to caption information

Return value None

Details Sets pCaption in caption information.

After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSPictureGetCaption

gwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSPictureGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value Pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information.

File name gwin.h

413
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set object status

Syntax void GCSPictureSetStatus(

GBaseObject *pPicture
unsigned char ucStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucStatus : set object status

Return value None

Details Sets the GCButton object status.

After the GCButton object status is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gwin.h

GCSPictureGetStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get object status

Syntax unsigned char GCSPictureGetStatus(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value Object status

Details Gets the GCButton object status.

File name gwin.h

414
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetMaxStatus

gwin.h
Outline Set maximus picture status

Syntax void GCSPictureSetMaxStatus(

GBaseObject *pPicture
unsigned char ucStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucMaxStatus : number of maximus picture status

Return value None

Details Sets number of maximus picture status.

The picture design shows that the status exist for the number of this setting.

File name gwin.h

GCSPictureGetMaxStatus

gwin.h
Outline Get maximus picture status

Syntax unsigned char GCSPictureGetMaxStatus(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value Number of maximus picture status

Details Gets number of maximus picture status.

File name gwin.h

415
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSPictureSetStatusDesign

gwin.h
Outline Set picture status design

Syntax void GCSPictureSetStatusDesign(

GBaseObject *pPicture
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

(i) GDesign *pDesign : pointer to status design arrangement

Return value None

Details Sets the pointer to picture status design arrangement.

After the pointer is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gwin.h

GCSPictureGetStatusDesign

gwin.h
Outline Get picture status design

Syntax GDesign* GCSPictureGetStatusDesign(

GBaseObject *pPicture
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPicture : object for operation

Return value NULL : no setting

Other than NULL : Pointer to status design arrangement

Details Gets the pointer to picture status design arrangement.

File name gwin.h

416
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSChangeActiveFocus

gwin.h
Outline Change active focus

Syntax void GCSChangeActiveFocus(

GBaseObject *pPanel,
GBaseObject *pObject
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPanel : pointer to management panel object

(i) GBaseObject *pObject : object setting the focus

Return value None

Details Changes the active focus to specified object.

File name gwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetAction

gncwin.h
Outline Set PLC button operations

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetAction(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned char ucAction
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucAction : PLC button operation

Return value None

Details Sets the PLC button operation.

One of the following values is set for ucAction:
GPLCBTN_ACT_NOACTION : no operation
GPLCBTN_ACT_MOMENTARY : momentary operation
GPLCBTN_ACT_ALTERNATE : alternative operation
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.

File name gncwin.h

417
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetAction

gncwin.h
Outline Get PLC button operations

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCButtonGetAction(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton object for operation

Return value GPLCBTN_ACT_NOACTION : no operation

GPLCBTN_ACT_MOMENTARY : momentary operation
GPLCBTN_ACT_ALTERNATE : alternative operation
Besides the above : illegal operation setting

Details Gets the PLC button operation setting.

When a setting outside the range is made, that setting value is returned.

File name gncwin.h

418
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisplay

gncwin.h
Outline Set PLC button display

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned char ucDisplay
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucDisplay : PLC button display

Return value None

Details Sets the PLC button display.

One of the following values is set for ucDisplay:
GPLCBTN_DISP_RECT : rectangle display
GPLCBTN_DISP_OVAL : round shape display
GPLCBTN_DISP_IMAGE : image display
When a value outside of the range is set, there is no forced change of the
setting.
After the button display is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

419
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisplay

gncwin.h
Outline Get PLC button display

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisplay(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value GPLCBTN_DISP_RECT : rectangle display

GPLCBTN_DISP_OVAL : round shape display
GPLCBTN_DISP_IMAGE : image display
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the PLC button display setting.

When a setting outside the range is made, that setting value is returned.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetBorderID

gncwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

420
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetBorderID

gncwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCButtonGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Set ON status design

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign *pDesign : pointer to design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for ON status.

After the design for ON status is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

421
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Get ON status design

Syntax GDesign *GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value pointer to design

Details Gets the design for ON status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Set OFF status design

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign *pDesign : pointer to design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for OFF status.

After the design for OFF status is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

422
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Get OFF status design

Syntax GDesign *GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value pointer to design

Details Gets the design for OFF status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Set ONON status design

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign *pDesign : pointer to design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for ONON status.

After the design for ONON status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

423
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Get ONON status design

Syntax GDesign *GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value pointer to design

Details Gets the design for ONON status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Set ONOFF status design

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign *pDesign : pointer to design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for ONOFF status.

After the design for ONOFF status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

424
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Get ONOFF status design

Syntax GDesign *GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value pointer to design

Details Gets the design for ONOFF status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Set FOCUS status design

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign *pDesign : pointer to design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for FOCUS status.

After the design for FOCUS status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

425
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Get FOCUS status design

Syntax GDesign *GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value pointer to design

Details Gets the design for FOCUS status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisableDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Set Disable status design

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisableDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
GDesign *pDesign
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) GDesign *pDesign : pointer to design

Return value None

Details Sets the design for Disable status.

After the design for Disable status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

426
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisableDesign

gncwin.h
Outline Get Disable status design

Syntax GDesign *GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisableDesign(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value pointer to design

Details Gets the design for Disable status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetFontID

gncwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

427
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetFontID

gncwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCButtonGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Set ON status caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the ON status caption character string resource ID.

After the ON status caption character string resource ID is set, the control area is
registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

428
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Get ON status caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the ON status caption character string resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Set OFF status caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the OFF status caption character string resource ID.
After the OFF status caption character string resource ID is set, the control area
is registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

429
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Get OFF status caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the OFF status caption character string resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Set ONON status caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the ONON status caption character string resource ID.
After the ONON status caption character string resource ID is set, the control
area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

430
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Get ONON status caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the ONON status caption character string resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Set ONOFF status caption character string resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned short usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : caption character string resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the ONOFF status caption character string resource ID.
After the ONOFF status caption character string resource ID is set, the control
area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

431
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffStringID

gncwin.h
Outline Get ONOFF status caption character string resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffStringID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value Caption character string resource ID

Details Gets the ONOFF status caption character string resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetCaption

gncwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : pointer to caption information

Return value None

Details Sets pCaption to the caption information.

After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

432
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetCaption

gncwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSNCPLCButtonGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information setting.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusEffect

gncwin.h
Outline Set effect during focus

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned char ucFocusEffect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucFocusEffect : effect during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the effect during focus.

One of the following values is set for ucFocusEffect:
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change
GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
After the effect during focus is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

433
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusEffect

gncwin.h
Outline Get effect during focus

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change

GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the effect used during focus.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Set object status

Syntax void GCSNCPLCButtonSetStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned char ucStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucStatus : Set object status

Return value None

Details Sets the GCNCPLCButton object ON/OFF status.

After the GCNCPLCButton object ON/OFF is set, the control area is registered
as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

434
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Get object status

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCButtonGetStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

Return value Object status

Details Gets the GCNCPLCButton object status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceType

gncwin.h
Outline Set PLC device operations

Syntax short GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceType(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
short nIndex,
unsigned char ucDeviceType
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : index No.
(i) unsigned char ucDeviceType : PLC device type

Return value FALSE : Abnormal (index No. illegal)

TRUE : Normal

Details Sets the PLC device type.

File name gncwin.h

435
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceType

gncwin.h
Outline Get PLC device operations

Syntax short GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceType (

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
short nIndex,
unsigned char *pDeviceType
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : index No.
(i) unsigned char *pDeviceType : PLC device type

Return value FALSE : Abnormal (index No. illegal)

TRUE : Normal

Details Gets the PLC device type.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetDevice

gncwin.h
Outline Set PLC device

Syntax short GCSNCPLCButtonSetDevice (

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
short nIndex,
char *szDevice
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : index No.
(i) char *szDevice : PLC device

Return value FALSE : Abnormal (index No. illegal)

TRUE : Normal

Details Sets the PLC device.

File name gncwin.h

436
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetDevice

gncwin.h
Outline Get PLC device

Syntax short GCSNCPLCButtonGetDevice(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
short nIndex,
char *szDevice
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : index No.
(i) char *szDevice : PLC device

Return value FALSE : Abnormal (index No. illegal)

TRUE : Normal

Details Gets the PLC device.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceVal

gncwin.h
Outline Set PLC device value

Syntax short GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceVal(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
short nIndex,
unsigned char ucDeviceVal e
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : index No.
(i) unsigned char ucDeviceVal : PLC device value

Return value FALSE : Abnormal (index No. illegal)

TRUE : Normal

Details Sets the PLC device value.

File name gncwin.h

437
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceVal

gncwin.h
Outline Get PLC device value

Syntax short GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceVal(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
short nIndex,
unsigned char *pDeviceVal
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) short nIndex : index No.
(i) unsigned char *pDeviceVal : PLC device value

Return value FALSE : Abnormal (index No. illegal)

TRUE : Normal

Details Gets the PLC device value.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBorderID

gncwin.h
Outline Set 3D border resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pPLCButton,
unsigned char usID
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCButton : object for operation

(i) unsigned char usID : 3D border resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the 3D border resource ID.

After the 3D border resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

438
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBorderID

gncwin.h
Outline Get 3D border resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBorderID(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value 3D border resource ID

Details Gets the 3D border resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFontID

gncwin.h
Outline Set font resource ID

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFontID(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned short usID

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usID : font resource ID

Return value None

Details Sets the font resource ID.

After the font resource ID is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

439
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFontID

gncwin.h
Outline Get font resource ID

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFontID(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Font resource ID

Details Gets the font resource ID.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCaption

gncwin.h
Outline Set caption information

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCaption(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GCaption *pCaption
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GCaption *pCaption : pointer to caption information

Return value None

Details Sets pCaption to the caption information.

After the caption information is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

440
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCaption

gncwin.h
Outline Get caption information

Syntax GCaption *GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCaption(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value pointer to caption information

Details Gets the caption information setting.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusEffect

gncwin.h
Outline Set effect during focus

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned char ucFocusEffect
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucFocusEffect : effect during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the effect during focus.

One of the following values is set for ucFocusEffect:
GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change
GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
After the effect during focus is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

441
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusEffect

gncwin.h
Outline Get effect during focus

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusEffect(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value GFOCUS_EFFECT_CHG_COLOR : design change

GFOCUS_EFFECT_NON : no effect
Besides the above : illegal display setting

Details Gets the effect used during focus.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set background color during focus

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color during focus

Return value None

Details Sets the background color during focus.

After the background color during focus is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

442
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusColor

gncwin.h
Outline Get background color during focus

Syntax GColor GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusColor(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color during focus

Details Gets the background color during focus.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetNormalColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set normal background color

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetNormalColor(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for normal background color

Return value None

Details Sets the normal background color.

After the normal background color is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

443
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetNormalColor

gncwin.h
Outline Get normal background color

Syntax GColor GCSNCPLCTextboxGetNormalColor(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Color code for normal background color

Details Gets the normal background color.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDisableColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set background color when disabled

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDisableColor(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
GColor gcColor
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color code for background color when
disabled

Return value None

Details Sets the background color when disabled.

After the background color when disabled is set, the control area is registered as
a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

444
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDisableColor

gncwin.h
Outline Get background color when disabled

Syntax GColor GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDisableColor(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Color code for background color setting when disabled

Details Gets the background color when disabled.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextType

gncwin.h
Outline Set character string type

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextType(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned char ucType
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucType : character string type

Return value None

Details Sets the display character string type.

One of the following values is set for ucType:
GPLCTEXT_TYPE_DEC : Signed decimal integer
GPLCTEXT_TYPE_UDEC : Unsigned decimal integer
GPLCTEXT_TYPE_HEX : Hexadecimal integer
GPLCTEXT_TYPE_FLOAT : Real number
After the character string type is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

445
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextType

gncwin.h
Outline Get character string type

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextType(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value GPLCTEXT_TYPE_DEC : Signed decimal integer

GPLCTEXT_TYPE_UDEC : Unsigned decimal integer
GPLCTEXT_TYPE_HEX : Hexadecimal integer
GPLCTEXT_TYPE_FLOAT : Real number
Besides the above : illegal setting

Details Gets the display character string type.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetPasswordStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Set password display status

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetPasswordStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : password display status
FALSE : normal display status
TRUE : password display status

Return value None

Details Sets whether the password will be displayed for text boxes or not.
After the password display status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

446
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetPasswordStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Get password display status

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetPasswordStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : normal display status

TRUE : password display status

Details Gets whether the test box display status is normal display status or the
password display status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCommaStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Set comma display status

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCommaStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : comma display status
FALSE : normal display status
TRUE : comma display status

Return value None

Details Sets whether commas will be displayed or not for text boxes.
After the comma display status is set, the control area is registered as a redraw
area.

File name gncwin.h

447
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCommaStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Get comma display status

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCommaStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : normal display status

TRUE : comma display status

Details Gets the setting as to whether the test box display status is normal display
status or the comma display status.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Set maximum value check status

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : setting for maximum value check status
FALSE : check disabled
TRUE : check enabled

Return value None

Details Sets the status of the maximum value check during SetValue/GetValue for the
PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

448
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCheckMaxStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Get maximum value check status

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCheckMaxStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox

Return value FALSE : check disabled

TRUE : check enabled

Details Gets the status of the maximum value check during SetValue/GetValue from
the PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMinStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Set minimum value check status

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMinStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : setting for minimum value check status
FALSE : check disabled
TRUE : check enabled

Return value None

Details Sets the status of the maximum value check during SetValue/GetValue for the
PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

449
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCheckMinStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Get minimum value check status

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCheckMinStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : check disabled

TRUE : check enabled

Details Gets the status of the minimum value check during SetValue/GetValue from the
PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMaxGValue

gncwin.h
Outline Set maximum value

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMaxGValue(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GValue gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue gvValue : maximum value

Return value None

Details Sets the value of the maximum value check during SetValue/GetValue for the
PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

450
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMaxGValue

gncwin.h
Outline Get maximum value

Syntax GValue GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMaxGValue(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Maximum value (GValue)

Details Gets the value of the maximum value check during SetValue/GetValue from
the PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMinGValue

gncwin.h
Outline Set minimum value

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMinGValue(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GValue gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue gvValue : minimum value

Return value None

Details Sets the value of the minimum value check during SetValue/GetValue for the
PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

451
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMinGValue

gncwin.h
Outline Get minimum value

Syntax GValue GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMinGValue(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Minimum value (GValue)

Details Gets the value of the minimum value check during SetValue/GetValue from the
PLC text box.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetString

gncwin.h
Outline Set display character string

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxSetString(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
const GTCHAR *pString
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) const char *pString : display character string

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the display character string.

File name gncwin.h

452
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetString

gncwin.h
Outline Get display character string

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetString(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GTCHAR *pString,
long lMaxCount
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(o) char *pString : buffer to store display character string
(i) long lMaxCount : buffer size

Return value FALSE : acquisition failed

TRUE : acquisition succeeded

Details Stores the display character string in pString.

File name gncwin.h

453
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetGValue

gncwin.h
Outline Set display value

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxSetGValue(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GValue gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue gvValue : setting value

Return value 0 : normal value

GTEXT_ERROR_UNDER_MIN_LIMIT : less than minimum value
GTEXT_ERROR_OVER_MAX_LIMIT : greater than maximum value

Details Sets the value displayed in a text box.

Numbers are converted to character strings according to the display format.
At this time, the maximum value and minimum value are checked, and if it is
outside of the range, an error is returned in the return value.
The error check is executed as follows:
GTEXT_TYPE_SHORT
GTEXT_TYPE_USHORT
GTEXT_TYPE_LONG
GTEXT_TYPE_ULONG
After the value displayed in a text box is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

454
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetGValue

gncwin.h
Outline Get display value

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetGValue(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
GValue *gvValue
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) GValue *gvValue : pointer to GValue variable stored value

Return value 0 : normal value

GTEXT_ERROR_UNDER_MIN_LIMIT : less than minimum value
GTEXT_ERROR_OVER_MAX_LIMIT : greater than maximum value

Details Gets the value displayed in a text box.

Character strings are converted to numbers according to the display format.
At this time, the maximum value and minimum value are checked, and if it is
outside of the range, an error is returned in the return value. The error check is
executed as follows:
GTEXT_TYPE_SHORT
GTEXT_TYPE_USHORT
GTEXT_TYPE_LONG
GTEXT_TYPE_ULONG

File name gncwin.h

455
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetStringBuffer

gncwin.h
Outline Set display buffer

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxSetStringBuffer(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned long ulBufferSize,
GTCHAR *pStringBuffer
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulBufferSize : buffer size
(i) char *pStringBuffer : character string buffer

Return value FALSE : setting failed

TRUE : setting succeeded

Details Sets the display buffer.

Allocates memory internally when pStringBuffer is NULL.
When a character string buffer is specified, that buffer is set.

File name gncwin.h

456
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetStringBuffer

gncwin.h
Outline Get display buffer

Syntax GTCHAR *GCSNCPLCTextboxGetStringBuffer(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned long *ulBufferSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned long *ulBufferSize : pointer to variable stored buffer size

Return value Display buffer address

Details Gets the display buffer.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBackGroundPattern

gncwin.h
Outline Set background fill status

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBackGroundPattern(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
short nBackGroundPattern
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) short nBackGroundPattern : background fill status

Return value None

Details Sets the background color fill status.

NO_DRAW and FILL_BACK_COLOR are the corresponding fill statuses.

File name gncwin.h

457
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBackGroundPattern

gncwin.h
Outline Get background fill status

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBackGroundPattern(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Background fill status

NO_DRAW : no fill
FILL_BACK_COLOR : background fill

Details Sets the background color fill status.

NO_DRAW and FILL_BACK_COLOR are the corresponding fill statuses.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringStartPos

gncwin.h
Outline Set selected character string start position

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringStartPos(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned short usStartPos
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usStartPos : selected character string start position

Return value None

Details Sets the selected character string start position.

File name gncwin.h

458
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringStartPos

gncwin.h
Outline Get selected character string start position

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringStartPos(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Selected character string start position

Details Gets the selected character string start position.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringEndPos

gncwin.h
Outline Set selected character string end position

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringEndPos(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned short usEndPos
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usEndPos : selected character string end position

Return value None

Details Sets the selected character string end position.

File name gncwin.h

459
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringEndPos

gncwin.h
Outline Get selected character string end position

Syntax unsigned short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringEndPos(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Selected character string end position

Details Gets the selected character string end position.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetIntegerWidth

gncwin.h
Outline Set integer part width

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetIntegerWidth(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned char ucWidth
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucWidth : number of integer part figures

Return value None

Details Sets the number of integer part figures.

File name gncwin.h

460
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetIntegerWidth

gncwin.h
Outline Get integer part width

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCTextboxGetIntegerWidth(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value The number of integer part figures

Details Gets the number of integer part figures.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDecimalWidth

gncwin.h
Outline Set decimal part width

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDecimalWidth(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned char ucWidth
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucWidth : number of decimal part figures

Return value None

Details Sets the number of decimal part figures.

File name gncwin.h

461
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDecimalWidth

gncwin.h
Outline Get decimal part width

Syntax unsigned char GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDecimalWidth (

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value The number of decimal part figures

Details Gets the number of decimal part figures.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetScale

gncwin.h
Outline Set scale

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetScale(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
double *pScale
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) double *pScale : scale

Return value None

Details Sets the scale.

File name gncwin.h

462
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetScale

gncwin.h
Outline Get scale

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxGetScale(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
double *pScale
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) double *pScale : scale

Return value None

Details Gets the scale.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetOffset

gncwin.h
Outline Set offset

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetOffset(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
long lOffset
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) long lOffset : offset

Return value None

Details Sets the offset.

File name gncwin.h

463
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetOffset

gncwin.h
Outline Get offset

Syntax long GCSNCPLCTextboxGetOffset(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value Offset

Details Gets the offset.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDevice

gncwin.h
Outline Set PLC device

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDevice(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
char *szDevice
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) char *szDevice : PLC device

Return value TRUE : acquisition succeeded

FALSE : acquisition failed

Details Sets the PLC device.

File name gncwin.h

464
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDevice

gncwin.h
Outline Get PLC device

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDevice(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
char *szDevice
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) char *szDevice : PLC device

Return value TRUE : acquisition succeeded

FALSE : acquisition failed

Details Gets the PLC device.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextSize

gncwin.h
Outline Set size

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextSize(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
unsigned long ulSize
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) unsigned long ulSize : PLC device size

Return value None

Details Sets the PLC device size.

One of the following values is set for ucType:
GPLCTEXT_SIZE_2 : 2 byte
GPLCTEXT_SIZE_4 : 4 byte
After the PLC device size is set, the control area is registered as a redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

465
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextSize

gncwin.h
Outline Get size

Syntax unsigned long GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextSize(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value GPLCTEXT_SIZE_2 : 2 byte

GPLCTEXT_SIZE_4 : 4 byte
Besides the above : illegal setting

Details Gets the PLC device size.

File name gncwin.h

GCSNCPLCTextboxSetZeroSuppressStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Set zero suppress display status

Syntax void GCSNCPLCTextboxSetZeroSuppressStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox,
short fStatus
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) short fStatus : zero suppress display status
FALSE : normal display status
TRUE : zero suppress display status

Return value None

Details Sets whether the zero suppress will be displayed for text boxes or not.
After the zero suppress display status is set, the control area is registered as a
redraw area.

File name gncwin.h

466
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCPLCTextboxGetZeroSuppressStatus

gncwin.h
Outline Get zero suppress display status

Syntax short GCSNCPLCTextboxGetZeroSuppressStatus(

GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

Return value FALSE : normal display status

TRUE : zero suppress display status

Details Gets whether the test box display status is normal display status or the zero
suppress display status.

File name gncwin.h

467
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetCellForeColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set foreground color of each cell

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetCellForeColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pPLCTextBox : object for operation

(i) Gcolor gcColor : color
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the foreground color of each cell.

File name gncwin.h

468
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetCellBackColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set background color of each cell

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetCellBackColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) Gcolor gcColor : color
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the background color of each cell.

File name gncwin.h

469
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetCellString

gncwin.h
Outline Set character string of each cell

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetCellString(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
const GTCHAR *pString,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) const GTCHAR *pString : set character string (0 to 128 characters)
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_MEMORYERROR : securing memory failed

Return value None

Details Sets the character string of each cell.

File name gncwin.h

470
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableGetCellString

gncwin.h
Outline Get character string of each cell

Syntax void GCSNCTableGetCellString(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GTCHAR *pString,
long lMaxCount,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GTCHAR *pString : character string to be acquired
(i) long lMaxCount : number of characters to be acquired
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_WRONGSTRINGGETSIZE : character string size to be
acquired illegal

Return value None

Details Gets the character string of each cell.

File name gncwin.h

471
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetSubCursorNum

gncwin.h
Outline Set sub-cursor position

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetSubCursorNum(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_DISABLESUBCURSOR : sub-cursor invalid
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the sub-cursor position.

File name gncwin.h

472
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableGetSubCursorNum

gncwin.h
Outline Get sub-cursor position

Syntax void GCSNCTableGetSubCursorNum(

GBaseObject *pSelf,,
unsigned short *uspLine,
unsigned short *usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GBaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short *uspLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short *usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_DISABLESUBCURSOR : sub-cursor invalid

Return value None

Details Gets the sub-cursor position.

File name gncwin.h

473
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetCellWidth

gncwin.h
Outline Set cell width

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetCellWidth(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usRowNum,
unsigned short usWidth,
unsigned short usRatioMode,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usRowNum : row No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usWidth : row width
(i) unsigned short usRatioMode : row proportion mode (0:proportion 1:pixel)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the cell width.

File name gncwin.h

474
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetCellHight

gncwin.h
Outline Set cell height

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetCellHight (

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usHight,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usHight : Hight
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal

Return value None

Details Sets the cell height.

File name gncwin.h

475
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableGetCellNumFromPoint

gncwin.h
Outline Get cell No. including pertinent coordinates

Syntax void GCSNCTableGetCellNumFromPoint(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GPoint gptPoint,,
unsigned short *uspLine,
unsigned short *uspRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GPoint gptPoint : coordinates
(i) unsigned short *uspLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short *uspRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Gets the cell No. including pertinent coordinates.

File name gncwin.h

476
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetLineTitleString

gncwin.h
Outline Set line title

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetLineTitleString(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
const GTCHAR *pString,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) const GTCHAR *pString : set character string
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_MEMORYERROR : securing memory failed

Return value None

Details Sets the line title.

File name gncwin.h

477
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableGetLineTitleString

gncwin.h
Outline Get line title

Syntax void GCSNCTableGetLineTitleString(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GTCHAR *pString,
long lMaxCount,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GTCHAR *pString : character string to be acquired
(i) long lMaxCount : number of characters to be acquired
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_MEMORYERROR : securing memory failed

Return value None

Details Gets the line title.

File name gncwin.h

478
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetRowTitleString

gncwin.h
Outline Set row title

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetRowTitleString(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GTCHAR *pString,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GTCHAR *pString : set character string
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_MEMORYERROR : securing memory failed

Return value None

Details Sets the row title.

File name gncwin.h

479
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableGetRowTitleString

gncwin.h
Outline Get row title

Syntax void GCSNCTableGetRowTitleString(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GTCHAR *pString,
long lMaxCount,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(o) GTCHAR *pString : character string to be acquired
(i) long lMaxCount : number of characters to be acquired
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_WRONGSTRINGGETSIZE : character string size to be
acquired illegal

Return value None

Details Gets the row title.

File name gncwin.h

480
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetLineTitleStringPosition

gncwin.h
Outline Set line title character string position

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetLineTitleStringPosition(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned char ucHPosition,
unsigned char ucVPosition,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucHPosition : character display position horizontal
(i) unsigned char ucVPosition : character display position vertical
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_ WRONGVALUE : value outside setting range

Return value None

Details Sets the line title character string position.

File name gncwin.h

481
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetRowTitleStringPosition

gncwin.h
Outline Set row title character string position

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetRowTitleStringPosition(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned char ucHPosition,
unsigned char ucVPosition,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucHPosition : character display position horizontal
(i) unsigned char ucVPosition : character display position vertical
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_ WRONGVALUE : value outside setting range

Return value None

Details Sets the row title character string position.

File name gncwin.h

482
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetCellStringPosition

gncwin.h
Outline Set area part character string position

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetCellStringPosition(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned char ucHPosition,
unsigned char ucVPosition,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned char ucHPosition : character display position horizontal
(i) unsigned char ucVPosition : character display position vertical
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range
GERR_NCTABLE_ WRONGVALUE : value outside setting range

Return value None

Details Sets the area part character string position.

File name gncwin.h

483
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetBeforeSubCursorNum

gncwin.h
Outline Set last sub-cursor No.

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetBeforeSubCursorNum(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_DISABLESUBCURSOR : sub-cursor invalid
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the last sub-cursor No.

File name gncwin.h

484
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableGetBeforeSubCursorNum

gncwin.h
Outline Get last sub-cursor No.

Syntax void GCSNCTableGetBeforeSubCursorNum(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
unsigned short *usLine,
unsigned short *usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) unsigned short *usLine : line No. (0 to)
(i) unsigned short *usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_DISABLESUBCURSOR : sub-cursor invalid

Return value None

Details Gets the last sub-cursor No.

File name gncwin.h

485
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetLineTitleForeColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set foreground color of line title

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetLineTitleForeColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the foreground color of line title.

File name gncwin.h

486
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetLineTitleBackColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set background color of line title

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetLineTitleBackColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short usLine,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color
(i) unsigned short usLine : line No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the background color of line title.

File name gncwin.h

487
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetRowTitleForeColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set foreground color of row title

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetRowTitleForeColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the foreground color of row title.

File name gncwin.h

488
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetRowTitleBackColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set background color of row title

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetRowTitleBackColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short usRow,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color
(i) unsigned short usRow : row No. (0 to)
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal
GERR_NCTABLE_NOTITLEMODE : title non-display mode
GERR_NCTABLE_RANGEOVER : cell No. outside range

Return value None

Details Sets the background color of row title.

File name gncwin.h

489
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetSubCursorForeColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set foreground color of sub-cursor

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetSubCursorForeColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal

Return value None

Details Sets the foreground color of sub-cursor.

File name gncwin.h

490
5. GCS
5.2 Description of GCS Functions

GCSNCTableSetSubCursorBackColor

gncwin.h
Outline Set background color of sub-cursor

Syntax void GCSNCTableSetSubCursorBackColor(

GBaseObject *pSelf,
GColor gcColor,
unsigned short *pusErrCode
)

Argument (i) GbaseObject *pSelf : object for operation

(i) GColor gcColor : color
(o) unsigned short *pusErrCode : error code
GERR_NOERR : normal

Return value None

Details Sets the background color of sub-cursor.

File name gncwin.h

491
 6. GIO
6.1 List of GIP Functions

6. GIO

This section describes the GIO function group.

6.1 List of GIP Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

1 GIOOpen HGIO GIO.c I/O open process
2 GIOClose void GIO.c I/O close process
3 GIORead unsigned long GIO.c I/O read
4 GIOWrite unsigned long GIO.c I/O write
5 GIOSeek long GIO.c File pointer movement

492
 6. GIO
6.2 Description of GIO Functions

6.2 Outline of GIO Functions

GIOOpen

GIO.c
Outline I/O open process

Syntax HGIO GIOOpen(

unsigned short usDirType,
GTCHAR *pIOName,
GTCHAR *pOperation
)

Argument (i) unsigned short usDirType : Standard directory

(i) GTCHAR *pIOName : name of I/O being opened
(i) GTCHAR *pOperation : opening operation

Return value NULL : open failed

Other than NULL : HGIO handle

Details Carries out the process for opening file I/O.

File name GIO.c

GIOClose

GIO.c
Outline I/O close process

Syntax void GIOClose(

HGIO hIO
)

Argument (i) HGIO hIO : handle being closed

Return value None

Details Carries out the process for closing file I/O.

File name GIO.c

493
6. GIO
6.2 Description of GIO Functions

GIORead

GIO.c
Outline I/O read

Syntax unsigned long GIORead(

void *pBuffer,
unsigned long ulSize,
unsigned long ulCount,
HGIO hIO
)

Argument (o) void *pBuffer : area for storing read results

(i) unsigned long ulSize : read data size units
(i) unsigned long ulCount : number of pieces of read data
(i) HGIO hIO : file handle

Return value Number of pieces of data read

Details Carries out the reading of data from file I/O.

File name GIO.c

494
6. GIO
6.2 Description of GIO Functions

GIOWrite

GIO.c
Outline I/O write

Syntax unsigned long GIOWrite(

void *pBuffer,
unsigned long ulSize,
unsigned long ulCount,
HGIO hIO
)

Argument (i) void *pBuffer : area for storing write results

(i) unsigned long ulSize : write data size units
(i) unsigned long ulCount : number of pieces of data written
(i) HGIO hIO : file handle

Return value Number of pieces of data written

Details Carries out the writing of data for file I/O.

File name GIO.c

495
6. GIO
6.2 Description of GIO Functions

GIOSeek

GIO.c
Outline File pointer movement

Syntax long GIOSeek(

HGIO hIO,
long lOffset,
long lOrigin
)

Argument (i) long lOffset : offset position from initial position

(i) long lOrigin : initial position

Return value Results from execution

0 : succeeded
Other than 0 : failed

Details Moves the file pointer to the specified position.

File name GIO.c

496
 7. GMMemory
7.1 List of GMMemory Functions

7. GMMemory

This section describes the GMMemory function group.

7.1 List of GMMemory Functions

No. Name Type File name Outline

1 GMGMemCreate GMGMEM GMMemory.c Create named shared memory area
2 GMGMemSelect GMGMEM GMMemory.c Select memory area
3 GMGMemDelete void GMMemory.c Release shared memory area
4 GMGMemGetShort short GMMemory.c Get shared memory 16 bit integer
5 GMGMemSetShort void GMMemory.c Set shared memory 16 bit integer
6 GMGMemGetChar char GMMemory.c Get shared memory 8 bit integer
7 GMGMemSetChar void GMMemory.c Set shared memory 8 bit integer
8 GMGMemGetLong long GMMemory.c Get shared memory 32 bit integer
9 GMGMemSetLong void GMMemory.c Set shared memory 32 bit integer
10 GMGMemGetDouble double GMMemory.c Get shared memory 64 bit floating point value
11 GMGMemSetDouble void GMMemory.c Set shared memory 64 bit floating point value
12 GMGMemGetString GTCHAR * GMMemory.c Get shared memory character string
13 GMGMemSetString void GMMemory.c Set shared memory character string

497
 7. GMMemory
7.2 Description of GMMemory Functions

7.2 Outline of GMMemory Functions

GMGMemCreate

GMMemory.c
Outline Create named shared memory area

Syntax GMGMEM GMGMemCreate(

GTCHAR *pszName,
unsigned long ulSize
)

Argument (i) GTCHAR *pszName : shared memory name

(i) unsigned long ulSize : allocation size

Return value Allocated region

Details Shared memory with the name specified in pszName and the size specified in
ulSize is allocated.

File name GMMemory.c

GMGMemSelect

GMMemory.c
Outline Select memory area

Syntax GMGMEM GMGMemSelect(

GTCHAR *pszLangStr
)

Argument (i) GTCHAR *pszLangStr : shared memory name

Return value Shared memory area

Details Selects the region for the specified name from the shared memory areas
previously created.

File name GMMemory.c

498
7. GMMemory
7.2 Description of GMMemory Functions

GMGMemDelete

GMMemory.c
Outline Release shared memory area

Syntax void GMGMemDelete(

GMGMEM gmem
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

Return value None

Details Releases the specified shared memory area.

File name GMMemory.c

GMGMemGetShort

GMMemory.c
Outline Get shared memory 16 bit integer

Syntax short GMGMemGetShort(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position

Return value 16 bit integer value

Details Gets the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the specified shared memory
as a 16 bit integer value.

File name GMMemory.c

499
7. GMMemory
7.2 Description of GMMemory Functions

GMGMemSetShort

GMMemory.c
Outline Set shared memory 16 bit integer

Syntax void GMGMemSetShort(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset,
short data
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position
(i) short data : setting value

Return value None

Details Sets a 16 bit integer value in the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the
specified shared memory.

File name GMMemory.c

GMGMemGetChar

GMMemory.c
Outline Get shared memory 8 bit integer

Syntax char GMGMemGetChar(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position

Return value 8 bit integer value

Details Gets the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the specified shared memory
as an 8 bit integer value.

File name GMMemory.c

500
7. GMMemory
7.2 Description of GMMemory Functions

GMGMemSetChar

GMMemory.c
Outline Set shared memory 8 bit integer

Syntax void GMGMemSetChar(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset,
char data
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position
(i) char data : setting value

Return value None

Details Sets an 8 bit integer value in the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the
specified shared memory.

File name GMMemory.c

GMGMemGetLong

GMMemory.c
Outline Get shared memory 32 bit integer

Syntax long GMGMemGetLong(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position

Return value 32 bit integer value

Details Gets the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the specified shared memory
as a 32 bit integer value.

File name GMMemory.c

501
7. GMMemory
7.2 Description of GMMemory Functions

GMGMemSetLong

GMMemory.c
Outline Set shared memory 32 bit integer

Syntax void GMGMemSetLong(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset,
long data
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position
(i) long data : setting value

Return value None

Details Sets a 32 bit integer value in the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the
specified shared memory.

File name GMMemory.c

GMGMemGetDouble

GMMemory.c
Outline Get shared memory 64 bit floating point value

Syntax double GMGMemGetDouble(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position

Return value 64 bit floating point value

Details Gets the ulOffset byte memory from the beginning of the specified shared
memory as a 64 bit floating point value.

File name GMMemory.c

502
7. GMMemory
7.2 Description of GMMemory Functions

GMGMemSetDouble

GMMemory.c
Outline Set shared memory 64 bit floating point value

Syntax void GMGMemSetDouble(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset,
double data
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position
(i) double data : setting value

Return value None

Details Sets a 64 bit floating point value in the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of
the specified shared memory.

File name GMMemory.c

GMGMemGetString

GMMemory.c
Outline Get shared memory area

Syntax GTCHAR *GMGMemGetString(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position
(o) GTCHAR *data : character string acquisition region

Return value None

Details Gets the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the specified shared memory
as a character string.

File name GMMemory.c

503
7. GMMemory
7.2 Description of GMMemory Functions

GMGMemSetString

GMMemory.c
Outline Set shared memory character string

Syntax void GMGMemSetString(

GMGMEM gmem,
unsigned long ulOffset,
GTCHAR *data
)

Argument (i) GMGMEM gmem : shared memory area

(i) unsigned long ulOffset : offset position
(i) GTCHAR *data : setting value

Return value None

Details Sets a character string in the ulOffset byte data from the beginning of the
specified shared memory.

File name GMMemory.c

504
 Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

The definitions for various structure data types are given in the following.

#define GColor long /* color variable */

#define HGFONT GFontHandle* /* 2 font handle */
#define HGDRAW GDraw* /* drawing handle */

/*****************************************************************************
* Rectangle structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GRect{
short nXmin; /* upper left X coordinate */
short nYmin; /* upper left Y coordinate */
short nXmax; /* lower right X coordinate */
short nYmax; /* lower right Y coordinate */
}GRect;

/*****************************************************************************
* Point structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GPoint{
short nX; /* X coordinate */
short nY; /* Y coordinate */
}GPoint;

/*****************************************************************************
* Line structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GLine{
short nX1; /* X coordinate for starting point */
short nY1; /* Y coordinate for starting point */
short nX2; /* X coordinate for ending point */
short nY2; /* Y coordinate for ending point */
}GLine;

505
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/*****************************************************************************
* Polygon structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GPoly{
short nNumPoints; /* number of vertices */
GPoint *pgptPoints; /* pointer to vertex data */
GRect grBounds; /* outline rectangle */
}GPoly;

/*****************************************************************************
* Brush structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GBrush{
short nFillPattern; /* fill pattern */
GColor gcForeColor; /* fill foreground color */
GColor gcBackColor; /* fill background color */
}GBrush;

/*****************************************************************************
* Border structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GBorder{
unsigned char fBorder; /* 3D border present or absent */
GColor gcULColor; /* upper left border color */
GColor gcLRColor; /* lower right border color */
GColor gcLineColor; /* line color */
short nSize; /* 3D border size */
}GBorder;

506
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/*****************************************************************************
* Caption structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GCaption{
GColor gcColor; /* caption character color */
unsigned char ucHPosition; /* horizontal display position */
unsigned char ucVPosition; /* vertical display position */
short nLeftMargin; /* left margin */
short nRightMargin; /* right margin */
short nTopMargin; /* top margin */
short nBottomMargin; /* bottom margin */
}GCaption;

/*****************************************************************************
* Cursor structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GCursor{
unsigned char ucType; /* cursor type */
GColor gcColor; /* cursor color */
}GCursor;

/*****************************************************************************
* Font structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GFontSize{
short nAscent; /* height from baseline to top line */
short nDscent; /* height from baseline to bottom line */
unsigned short usWidth; /* basic character width */
unsigned short usHeight; /* character height */
unsigned short usMaxWidth; /* maximum character width */
}GFontSize;

507
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/*****************************************************************************
* Simple font structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GSimpleFont{
GTCHAR szFontName[MAX_FONTNAME_LEN+1]; /* font name */
unsigned char ucSize; /* font size */
unsigned char gptXScale; /* horizontal scale */
unsigned char gptYScale; /* vertical scale */
unsigned char ucWeight; /* thickness */
unsigned char ucStyle; /* shape */
}GSimpleFont;

typedef struct _GFont{

short nID; /* font ID */
GTCHAR szFontName[MAX_FONTNAME_LEN+1]; /* font name */
unsigned short usCharacterSet; /* character code */
short nFontSizeCount; /* number of font sizes */
GFontSize *gfsSize; /* pointer to font size array */
short nFixedWidth; /* fixed width font information */
long lFontSupport; /* forms supported by the font (italics, bold, etc.) */
}GFont;

typedef struct _GFontAttribute{

unsigned short usWidth; /* character width */
unsigned short usHeight; /* character height */
unsigned short usWeight; /* character thickness */
unsigned short usItalic; /* character italics */
unsigned short usOutline; /* character border */
void *pData; /* additional information */
unsigned char ucXScale; /* horizontal scale */
unsigned char ucYScale; /* vertical scale */
}GFontAttribute;

508
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

typedef struct _GFontPattern{

GTCHAR *pcChar; /* pointer to character data */
GTCHAR *pcNextChar; /* pointer to next character data */
short nWidth; /* width */
short nHeight; /* height */
short nBpp; /* number of dots per pixel */
char *pcPattern; /* pointer to pattern */
short nGetSize; /* get size flag */
}GFontPattern;

typedef struct _GFontHandle{

short nID; /* font ID */
short nAttributeType; /* use either pgfaAttribute or */
/* pnAttributeArray as attribute */
GFontAttribute *pgfaAttribute; /* font attribute */
short *pnAttributeArray; /* font attribute (array) */
}GFontHandle;

509
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/*****************************************************************************
* Image data structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GRFHeader{
short nType; /* image type */
short nWidth; /* width */
short nHeight; /* height */
short nBpp; /* number of bits per pixel */
long lSize; /* data size */
unsigned char *pData; /* pointer to real data */
}GRFHeader;
typedef struct _GRFHeaderDIB{
short nType; /* image type */
short nWidth; /* width */
short nHeight; /* height */
short nBpp; /* number of bits per pixel */
long lSize; /* data size */
unsigned char *pData; /* pointer to real data */
unsigned char *pPalette; /* pointer to palette data */
}GRFHeaderDIB;

/* image structure */
typedef struct _GImage{
GRFHeader *pImage; /* pointer to image data structure */
}GImage;

/*****************************************************************************
* System time structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GSystemTime{
unsigned long ulLTime; /* lower-side 32 bits for system time */
unsigned long ulUTime; /* upper-side 32 bits for system time */
}GSystemTime;

510
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/*****************************************************************************
* Drawing environment structure
*****************************************************************************/
/* GDraw structure */
typedef struct _GDraw{
GRect grLocalRect; /* physical coordinate area */
GPoint gptLocalOrigin; /* position of origin on physical coordinates */
GRect grVirtualRect; /* virtual coordinate area */
GRect grClipRect; /* clipping rectangle */
GPoint gptPenPosition; /* current position */
GColor gcPenColor; /* line color */
GPoint gptPenSize; /* line thickness */
short nPenCap; /* line end shape */
short nPenJoin; /* line contact shape */
short nPenDash; /* line type No. */
short nDashOffset; /* line pattern offset */
short nTextMode; /* text mode */
GColor gcForeColor; /* fill foreground color */
GColor gcBackColor; /* fill background color */
short nFillPattern; /* fill pattern No. */
short nDrawCondition; /* drawing condition */
short nDrawingMode; /* raster operation */
HGVRAM hSystemVram; /* display destination VRAM */
HGVRAM hDrawVram; /* drawing destination VRAM */
HGFONT hFont; /* font */
void *vgdftDraw; /* function table for drawing */
char cDashPatterns[NUM_DASH_PATS][DASH_PAT_SIZE];
/* line pattern */
char cFillPatterns[NUM_FILL_PATS][FILL_PAT_SIZE];
/* fill pattern */
GDrawParamPoly gpPoly; /* polygon drawing parameter */
GDrawParamWideLine gpwWideLine; /* wide line drawing parameter */
GDrawParamOval gpwOval; /* circle, arc and sector drawing parameter */
unsigned short usErrorCode; /* previous error code */
unsigned char ucGradationType; /* gradation type */
/* (0: up to down, 1: left to right) */
GColor gcGradationColor1; /* color1 */
GColor gcGradationColor2; /* color2 */
unsigned short usVertexPos; /* gradation vertex position (0 to 100) */
unsigned short usGradationLevel; /* gradation level (0 to 256) */
unsigned char ucColorMode; /* actual VRAM color
environment information */
GColor gcRedMask; /* direct color R value mask */
GColor gcGreenMask; /* direct color G value mask */
GColor gcBlueMask; /* direct color B value mask */
char cRedShift; / * direct color R value shift value */
char cGreenShift; /* direct color G value shift value */
char cBlueShift; /* direct color B value shift value */
GColor gcForeColorOrg; /* foreground color (original) */
GColor gcBackColorOrg; /* background color (original) */
GColor gcPenColorOrg; /* background color (original) */

unsigned long ulExParam; /* extension parameter */

short nExParam; /* extension parameter */
}GDraw;

511
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/*****************************************************************************
* Memory management structure
*****************************************************************************/
typedef struct _GMemory{
unsigned char fUseSpace; /* shows use (0)/not use (1) status for memory space */
unsigned char cReserve[3]; /* reserved space (for 4 byte environment adjustment) */
unsigned long ulSize; /* memory space size */
struct _GMemory *pvPrevMemorySpace;
/* pointer to GMemory in previous memory space */
struct _GMemory *pvSmallMemorySpace; /* pointer to space GMemory in small */
/* memory space */
struct _GMemory *pvLargeMemorySpace; /* pointer to space GMemory in large */
/* memory space */
}GMemory;

typedef struct _GMemorySpaceInformation{

unsigned char ucType; /* memory space type */
unsigned char ucPlane; /* memory space plane No. */
unsigned char cReserve[2]; /* reserved space (for 4 byte environment adjustment) */
char *pvMemorySpace; /* pointer to memory space allocated by user */
unsigned long ulMemorySpaceSize;
/* size of memory space allocated by user (multiples of 32) */
GMemory *pgmNoUseMemoryTree;
/* pointer to unused two-branch memory management */
}GMemorySpaceInformation;

512
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/*****************************************************************************
* Control related structures
*****************************************************************************/
/* Design structure */
typedef struct GDesign{
GBrush gbBrush; /* fill brush */
unsigned short usImageID; /* image resource ID */
}GDesign;

/* Focus movement structure */

typedef struct GFocusObject{
unsigned short usKeyCode; /* virtual key code */
unsigned short usType; /* focus movement method */
unsigned short usID; /* ID of object being moved */
}GFocusObject;

/* Focus movement structure */

typedef struct GFocusInformation{
unsigned short usCount; /* number of focus settings */
GFocusObject *pFocusArray; /* focus setting (array) */
}GFocusInformation;

/* Value structure */
typedef union GValue{
short nValue; /* short value */
unsigned short usValue; /* unsigned short value */
long lValue; /* long value */
unsigned long ulValue; /* unsigned long value */
float fValue; /* float value */
}GValue;

513
Appendix 1. Data Type Definitions

/* GBaseWindow Export/Import structure */

typedef struct GBaseWindowProperty{
unsigned short usType; /* object type */
unsigned short usID; /* object ID */
short nX; /* X coordinate */
short nY; /* Y coordinate */
short nWidth; /* width */
short nHeight; /* height */
unsigned long ulStyle; /* object shape */
GFocusInformation *pFocusInfo; /* focus object */
}GBaseWindowProperty;

514
 Index

Index

GC GCSButtonSetStatus................................................271
GCSButtonSetStringID.............................................268
GCSA GCSBWLAdd ...........................................................394
GCSBWLClear .........................................................395
GCSAddBlinkControl ............................................... 198 GCSBWLCount ........................................................400
GCSAddChangePageLog........................................ 232 GCSBWLDelete .......................................................402
GCSAddChild .......................................................... 189 GCSBWLFindFirstItem.............................................398
GCSAddDirtyRect.................................................... 172 GCSBWLFindLastItem .............................................399
GCSAddOperationLog............................................. 231 GCSBWLFindListItem ..............................................398
GCSAddPageLog .................................................... 228 GCSBWLFindNextItem ............................................399
GCSAddRefreshRect............................................... 155 GCSBWLFindPrevItem ............................................400
GCSAddScrollControl .............................................. 199 GCSBWLGetFirst .....................................................397
GCSAddTimerObject ............................................... 218 GCSBWLGetItemPosition ........................................401
GCSAddWindow...................................................... 208 GCSBWLGetLast .....................................................397
GCSAttachPanel ..................................................... 200 GCSBWLInit .............................................................394
GCSBWLMoveFirst ..................................................396
GCSBWLMoveLast ..................................................396
GCSB GCSBWLNew...........................................................402
GCSBWLRemove ....................................................395
GCSBeginModal ...................................................... 185 GCSBWLSetItemPosition.........................................401
GCSButtonGetAction............................................... 260
GCSButtonGetBorderID .......................................... 263
GCSButtonGetCaption ............................................ 270 GCSC
GCSButtonGetDisableDesign.................................. 267
GCSButtonGetDisplay ............................................. 262 GCSCalcClientRect..................................................140
GCSButtonGetFocusDesign.................................... 266 GCSCallBackMessage.............................................249
GCSButtonGetFocusEffect...................................... 271 GCSChangeActiveFocus .........................................417
GCSButtonGetFontID .............................................. 268 GCSChangeFocus ...................................................208
GCSButtonGetOffDesign......................................... 265 GCSChar..................................................................167
GCSButtonGetOnDesign......................................... 264 GCSCheckboxGetBorderID......................................273
GCSButtonGetStatus............................................... 272 GCSCheckboxGetBoxColor .....................................281
GCSButtonGetStringID............................................ 269 GCSCheckboxGetBoxSize.......................................280
GCSButtonSetAction ............................................... 259 GCSCheckboxGetCaption .......................................276
GCSButtonSetBorderID........................................... 262 GCSCheckboxGetDisableBoxColor .........................284
GCSButtonSetCaption............................................. 269 GCSCheckboxGetDisableCaptionColor ...................283
GCSButtonSetDisableDesign .................................. 266 GCSCheckboxGetFocusColor..................................282
GCSButtonSetDisplay ............................................. 261 GCSCheckboxGetFocusEffect .................................277
GCSButtonSetFocusDesign .................................... 265 GCSCheckboxGetFontID .........................................274
GCSButtonSetFocusEffect ...................................... 270 GCSCheckboxGetStatus..........................................279
GCSButtonSetFontID .............................................. 267 GCSCheckboxGetStringID .......................................275
GCSButtonSetOffDesign ......................................... 264 GCSCheckboxSetBorderID ......................................272
GCSButtonSetOnDesign ......................................... 263 GCSCheckboxSetBoxColor......................................280

X-1
 Index

GCSCheckboxSetBoxSize ...................................... 279 GCSEditGetForeColor..............................................295

GCSCheckboxSetCaption ....................................... 275 GCSEditGetInsertMode............................................297
GCSCheckboxSetDisableBoxColor ......................... 283 GCSEditGetLength...................................................300
GCSCheckboxSetDisableCaptionColor................... 282 GCSEditGetLineBrush .............................................298
GCSCheckboxSetFocusColor ................................. 281 GCSEditGetLineCount .............................................305
GCSCheckboxSetFocusEffect................................. 276 GCSEditGetLineFeedCode ......................................293
GCSCheckboxSetFontID......................................... 273 GCSEditGetLineString .............................................292
GCSCheckboxSetStatus ......................................... 278 GCSEditGetLineTextColor .......................................299
GCSCheckboxSetStringID....................................... 274 GCSEditGetString ....................................................287
GCSClearDrawStatus.............................................. 171 GCSEditGetTextColor ..............................................288
GCSClearOperationLog........................................... 231 GCSEditInsertLine....................................................291
GCSClearPageLog .................................................. 227 GCSEditInsertString .................................................305
GCSClientToScreen ................................................ 141 GCSEditRemoveString.............................................306
GCSClose................................................................ 167 GCSEditReplace ......................................................303
GCSCreate .............................................................. 151 GCSEditReplaceAll ..................................................304
GCSCreateChildren................................................. 191 GCSEditReverseFind ...............................................302
GCSCreateGWindow............................................... 226 GCSEditSetBackColor .............................................289
GCSCreateInstance................................................. 221 GCSEditSetBorderID................................................284
GCSCreateVram ..................................................... 152 GCSEditSetBrush.....................................................290
GCSEditSetCursor ...................................................294
GCSEditSetFillPattern..............................................296
GCSD GCSEditSetFontID ...................................................285
GCSEditSetForeColor ..............................................295
GCSDelete .............................................................. 152 GCSEditSetInsertMode ............................................297
GCSDeleteAllChildren ............................................. 192 GCSEditSetLineBrush..............................................298
GCSDeleteChild ...................................................... 168 GCSEditSetLineFeedCode ......................................293
GCSDispatchMessage ............................................ 209 GCSEditSetLineTextColor........................................299
GCSDoModal .......................................................... 215 GCSEditSetString.....................................................287
GCSDrawBackGround............................................. 225 GCSEditSetTextColor ..............................................288
GCSDrawChildren ................................................... 200 GCSEndModal .........................................................186
GCSDrawFrame ...................................................... 222 GCSExportProperty..................................................151
GCSDrawPanel ....................................................... 223

GCSF
GCSE
GCSFreeLoadData...................................................183
GCSEditAddLine ..................................................... 291
GCSEditAddString ................................................... 286
GCSEditDeleteLine.................................................. 292 GCSG
GCSEditDeleteString ............................................... 290
GCSEditFind............................................................ 301 GCSGetActiveChild..................................................195
GCSEditGetBackColor ............................................ 289 GCSGetActiveControl ..............................................195
GCSEditGetBorderID............................................... 285 GCSGetActiveWindow .............................................220
GCSEditGetBrush.................................................... 306 GCSGetAngle...........................................................253
GCSEditGetCursor .................................................. 294 GCSGetBackGroundDesign.....................................191
GCSEditGetFillPattern............................................. 296 GCSGetBlinkEnableStatus.......................................237
GCSEditGetFontID .................................................. 286 GCSGetBlinkOffInterval ...........................................196

X-2
 Index

GCSGetBlinkOnInterval........................................... 197 GCSGetPenColor.....................................................250

GCSGetBlinkStatus ................................................. 175 GCSGetPenDash .....................................................251
GCSGetBlinkType ................................................... 236 GCSGetPenSize ......................................................252
GCSGetBounds....................................................... 140 GCSGetPoly.............................................................257
GCSGetBrush.......................................................... 254 GCSGetPosition .......................................................137
GCSGetCaptionScrollDelayTime............................. 243 GCSGetPrevBlinkControl .........................................177
GCSGetCaptionScrollEnable................................... 239 GCSGetPrevScrollControl ........................................179
GCSGetCaptionScrollMovementValue .................... 245 GCSGetPrevTimerObject .........................................173
GCSGetCaptionScrollPosition ................................. 247 GCSGetRedrawStatus .............................................171
GCSGetCaptionScrollRefreshTime ......................... 244 GCSGetRetValue .....................................................185
GCSGetCaptionScrollStartPosition.......................... 246 GCSGetScreen ........................................................182
GCSGetCaptionScrollStatus.................................... 242 GCSGetSize.............................................................139
GCSGetCaptionStatus............................................. 146 GCSGetStartPoint ....................................................255
GCSGetChild........................................................... 192 GCSGetStyle............................................................142
GCSGetChildAll ....................................................... 193 GCSGetStyleStatus..................................................149
GCSGetChildList ..................................................... 190 GCSGetSystemActiveColor......................................206
GCSGetClientRect................................................... 141 GCSGetSystemBackColor .......................................205
GCSGetCloseButtonStatus ..................................... 188 GCSGetSystemBorderID .........................................203
GCSGetConsumableStatus..................................... 145 GCSGetSystemFontID .............................................202
GCSGetDrawForceStatus ....................................... 170 GCSGetSystemForeColor ........................................204
GCSGetEdgeStatus................................................. 189 GCSGetSystemInactiveColor ...................................207
GCSGetEnableStatus.............................................. 144 GCSGetSystemPaletteID .........................................217
GCSGetEndPoint..................................................... 256 GCSGetSystemStatus..............................................214
GCSGetExitStatus ................................................... 213 GCSGetTitleBarStatus .............................................187
GCSGetFocus ......................................................... 209 GCSGetType............................................................135
GCSGetFocusInformation ....................................... 166 GCSGetVisibleStatus ...............................................143
GCSGetFocusStatus ............................................... 147 GCSGetWDC ...........................................................210
GCSGetFrame......................................................... 207 GCSGetWidth...........................................................138
GCSGetGBaseObject.............................................. 183 GCSGetWindow .......................................................219
GCSGetHeight......................................................... 138 GCSGetWindowPlane ..............................................212
GCSGetHWDC ........................................................ 210 GCSGetXPosition.....................................................136
GCSGetID ............................................................... 135 GCSGetYPosition.....................................................136
GCSGetMemorySpace ............................................ 169
GCSGetModalStatus ............................................... 184
GCSGetNextBlinkControl ........................................ 178 GCSH
GCSGetNextScrollControl ....................................... 180
GCSGetNextTimerObject ........................................ 174 GCSHtmlbrowserGetBackColor ...............................311

GCSGetOperationLog ............................................. 230 GCSHtmlbrowserGetBorderID .................................307

GCSGetPageNumber .............................................. 232 GCSHtmlbrowserGetFontID .....................................308

GCSGetPageOffset ................................................. 230 GCSHtmlbrowserGetHtmlFileName .........................313

GCSGetPaletteColors.............................................. 218 GCSHtmlbrowserGetLinkColor.................................312

GCSGetPaletteStatus.............................................. 216 GCSHtmlbrowserGetScrollBarWidth ........................309

GCSGetPanel .......................................................... 201 GCSHtmlbrowserGetTextColor ................................310

GCSGetPanelPlane................................................. 211 GCSHtmlbrowserSetBackColor................................311

GCSGetPanelStatus................................................ 148 GCSHtmlbrowserSetBorderID..................................307

GCSGetParent ........................................................ 150 GCSHtmlbrowserSetFontID .....................................308

GCSGetParentPanel ............................................... 176 GCSHtmlbrowserSetHtmlFileName .........................313

X-3
 Index

GCSHtmlbrowserSetLinkColor ................................ 312 GCSListInsertString..................................................333

GCSHtmlbrowserSetScrollBarWidth........................ 309 GCSListRemoveAllStrings .......................................329
GCSHtmlbrowserSetTextColor ................................ 310 GCSListRemoveString .............................................334
GCSListSetBorderID ................................................317
GCSListSetCaption ..................................................319
GCSI GCSListSetCurrentSelect.........................................329
GCSListSetDisableColor ..........................................324
GCSImportProperty ................................................. 150 GCSListSetEnableScrollBarStatus...........................331
GCSIsCaptionOutOfBounds .................................... 242 GCSListSetFocusColor ............................................320
GCSIsCaptionScrollFinish ....................................... 248 GCSListSetFontID....................................................318
GCSListSetMaxListLines..........................................327
GCSListSetNormalColor ..........................................323
GCSK GCSListSetScrollBarColor .......................................322
GCSListSetScrollBarWidth .......................................325
GCSKeyPress ......................................................... 162
GCSListSetScrollButtonColor...................................321
GCSKeyRelease...................................................... 163
GCSListSetSelectBarColor.......................................326
GCSKillFocus .......................................................... 164
GCSListSetTopLine..................................................332
GCSListSetVisibleScrollBarStatus ...........................330
GCSLoadData ..........................................................181
GCSL
GCSLoadGWindow ..................................................234

GCSLabelGetCaption .............................................. 316 GCSLoadProjectFile.................................................233

GCSLabelGetFontID................................................ 314 GCSLoadScreenFile ................................................249

GCSLabelGetStringID ............................................. 315

GCSLabelSetCaption .............................................. 316
GCSM
GCSLabelSetFontID ................................................ 314
GCSLabelSetStringID.............................................. 315
GCSModalGWindow ................................................234
GCSLButtonPress ................................................... 156
GCSMouseMove ......................................................160
GCSLButtonRelease ............................................... 159
GCSListAddString.................................................... 328
GCSListGetBorderID ............................................... 317
GCSN
GCSListGetCaption ................................................. 319
GCSListGetCurrentSelect........................................ 330 GCSNCPLCButtonGetAction ...................................418
GCSListGetDisableColor ......................................... 324 GCSNCPLCButtonGetBorderID ...............................421
GCSListGetEnableScrollBarStatus.......................... 332 GCSNCPLCButtonGetCaption .................................433
GCSListGetFocusColor ........................................... 320 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDevice ..................................437
GCSListGetFontID................................................... 318 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceType ..........................436
GCSListGetLineCount ............................................. 334 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDeviceVal .............................438
GCSListGetListString............................................... 328 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisableDesign ......................427
GCSListGetMaxListLines......................................... 327 GCSNCPLCButtonGetDisplay..................................420
GCSListGetNormalColor ......................................... 323 GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusDesign ........................426
GCSListGetScrollBarColor ...................................... 322 GCSNCPLCButtonGetFocusEffect ..........................434
GCSListGetScrollBarWidth...................................... 325 GCSNCPLCButtonGetFontID...................................428
GCSListGetScrollButtonColor.................................. 321 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffDesign .............................423
GCSListGetSelectBarColor ..................................... 326 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOffStringID............................430
GCSListGetTopLine................................................. 333 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnDesign .............................422
GCSListGetVisibleScrollBarStatus .......................... 331 GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffDesign.........................425

X-4
 Index

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOffStringID ...................... 432 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetString..................................453

GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnDesign ........................ 424 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetStringBuffer ........................457
GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnOnStringID ...................... 431 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextSize .............................466
GCSNCPLCButtonGetOnStringID ........................... 429 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetTextType ............................446
GCSNCPLCButtonGetStatus .................................. 435 GCSNCPLCTextboxGetZeroSuppressStatus ..........467
GCSNCPLCButtonSetAction ................................... 417 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBackGroundPattern ............457
GCSNCPLCButtonSetBorderID............................... 420 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetBorderID .............................438
GCSNCPLCButtonSetCaption................................. 432 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCaption ...............................440
GCSNCPLCButtonSetDevice .................................. 436 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus ................448
GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceType .......................... 435 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCheckMinStatus .................449
GCSNCPLCButtonSetDeviceVal ............................. 437 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetCommaStatus.....................447
GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisableDesign ...................... 426 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDecimalWidth .....................461
GCSNCPLCButtonSetDisplay ................................. 419 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDevice ................................464
GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusDesign ........................ 425 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetDisableColor.......................444
GCSNCPLCButtonSetFocusEffect .......................... 433 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusColor .........................442
GCSNCPLCButtonSetFontID .................................. 427 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFocusEffect ........................441
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffDesign ............................. 422 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetFontID.................................439
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOffStringID ........................... 429 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetGValue ...............................454
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnDesign ............................. 421 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetIntegerWidth .......................460
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffDesign ........................ 424 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMaxGValue.........................450
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOffStringID....................... 431 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetMinGValue..........................451
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnDesign ........................ 423 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetNormalColor .......................443
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnOnStringID....................... 430 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetOffset..................................463
GCSNCPLCButtonSetOnStringID ........................... 428 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetPasswordStatus .................446
GCSNCPLCButtonSetStatus................................... 434 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetScale ..................................462
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBackGroundPattern........... 458 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringEndPos ...........459
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetBorderID............................ 439 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetSelectStringStartPos ..........458
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCaption .............................. 441 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetString ..................................452
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCheckMaxStatus ............... 449 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetStringBuffer ........................456
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCheckMinStatus ................ 450 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextSize .............................465
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetCommaStatus.................... 448 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetTextType ............................445
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDecimalWidth .................... 462 GCSNCPLCTextboxSetZeroSuppressStatus...........466
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDevice ............................... 465 GCSNCTableGetBeforeSubCursorNum ..................485
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetDisableColor...................... 445 GCSNCTableGetCellNumFromPoint .......................476
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusColor ........................ 443 GCSNCTableGetCellString ......................................471
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFocusEffect ....................... 442 GCSNCTableGetLineTitleString...............................478
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetFontID ............................... 440 GCSNCTableGetRowTitleString ..............................480
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetGValue .............................. 455 GCSNCTableGetSubCursorNum .............................473
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetIntegerWidth ...................... 461 GCSNCTableSetBeforeSubCursorNum ...................484
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMaxGValue........................ 451 GCSNCTableSetCellBackColor ...............................469
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetMinGValue ........................ 452 GCSNCTableSetCellForeColor ................................468
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetNormalColor ...................... 444 GCSNCTableSetCellHight .......................................475
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetOffset................................. 464 GCSNCTableSetCellString.......................................470
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetPasswordStatus ................ 447 GCSNCTableSetCellStringPosition..........................483
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetScale ................................. 463 GCSNCTableSetCellWidth.......................................474
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringEndPos .......... 460 GCSNCTableSetLineTitleBackColor ........................487
GCSNCPLCTextboxGetSelectStringStartPos ......... 459 GCSNCTableSetLineTitleForeColor.........................486

X-5
 Index

GCSNCTableSetLineTitleString .............................. 477 GCSProgressbarGetBackGroundDesign .................335

GCSNCTableSetLineTitleStringPosition.................. 481 GCSProgressbarGetBarDesign................................336
GCSNCTableSetRowTitleBackColor ....................... 489 GCSProgressbarGetDirection ..................................339
GCSNCTableSetRowTitleForeColor........................ 488 GCSProgressbarGetRange......................................337
GCSNCTableSetRowTitleString .............................. 479 GCSProgressbarGetValue .......................................339
GCSNCTableSetRowTitleStringPosition ................. 482 GCSProgressbarSetBackGroundDesign..................335
GCSNCTableSetSubCursorBackColor.................... 491 GCSProgressbarSetBarDesign ................................336
GCSNCTableSetSubCursorForeColor .................... 490 GCSProgressbarSetDirection...................................338
GCSNCTableSetSubCursorNum............................. 472 GCSProgressbarSetRange ......................................337
GCSNextPage ......................................................... 229 GCSProgressbarSetValue .......................................340

GCSO GCSR

GCSOnDraw............................................................ 153 GCSRadiobuttonGetBorderID ..................................341

GCSOnDrawWindow ............................................... 224 GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxColor..................................348
GCSOnLButtonPress............................................... 157 GCSRadiobuttonGetBoxSize ...................................347
GCSOnLButtonRelease........................................... 159 GCSRadiobuttonGetCaption ....................................344
GCSOnMouseMove................................................. 161 GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableBoxColor......................351
GCSOnNcDraw ....................................................... 154 GCSRadiobuttonGetDisableCaptionColor................350
GCSOnNcLButtonPress .......................................... 158 GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusColor ..............................349
GCSOnNcLButtonRelease ...................................... 160 GCSRadiobuttonGetFocusEffect..............................345
GCSOnNcMouseMove ............................................ 161 GCSRadiobuttonGetFontID......................................342
GCSRadiobuttonGetRadioGroup .............................352
GCSRadiobuttonGetStatus ......................................346
GCSP GCSRadiobuttonGetStringID....................................343
GCSRadiobuttonSetBorderID...................................340
GCSPageLogOperation........................................... 222 GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxColor ..................................347
GCSPaint................................................................. 153 GCSRadiobuttonSetBoxSize....................................346
GCSPauseCaptionScroll ......................................... 240 GCSRadiobuttonSetCaption.....................................343
GCSPictureGetBorderID.......................................... 410 GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableBoxColor ......................350
GCSPictureGetCaption............................................ 413 GCSRadiobuttonSetDisableCaptionColor ................349
GCSPictureGetDisplay ............................................ 409 GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusColor...............................348
GCSPictureGetFontID ............................................. 411 GCSRadiobuttonSetFocusEffect ..............................344
GCSPictureGetMaxStatus ....................................... 415 GCSRadiobuttonSetFontID ......................................341
GCSPictureGetStatus.............................................. 414 GCSRadiobuttonSetRadioGroup..............................351
GCSPictureGetStatusDesign................................... 416 GCSRadiobuttonSetStatus.......................................345
GCSPictureGetStringID ........................................... 412 GCSRadiobuttonSetStringID ....................................342
GCSPictureSetBorderID .......................................... 410 GCSRemoveBlinkControl .........................................198
GCSPictureSetCaption ............................................ 413 GCSRemoveScrollControl........................................199
GCSPictureSetDisplay............................................. 408 GCSRemoveTimerObject.........................................219
GCSPictureSetFontID.............................................. 411 GCSRestartCaptionScroll.........................................241
GCSPictureSetMaxStatus ....................................... 415
GCSPictureSetStatus .............................................. 414
GCSPictureSetStatusDesign ................................... 416 GCSS
GCSPictureSetStringID ........................................... 412
GCSPrevPage ......................................................... 228 GCSScrollbarexGetBackGroundColor .....................364

X-6
 Index

GCSScrollbarexGetBarEnableStatus ...................... 368 GCSSetCloseButtonStatus ......................................187

GCSScrollbarexGetDirection ................................... 355 GCSSetConsumableStatus ......................................144
GCSScrollbarexGetDisplay ..................................... 353 GCSSetDrawAttribute ..............................................258
GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOffImgID ...................... 363 GCSSetDrawForceStatus ........................................169
GCSScrollbarexGetNextBtnOnImgID ...................... 362 GCSSetEdgeStatus..................................................188
GCSScrollbarexGetOutLineBorderID ...................... 365 GCSSetEnableStatus...............................................143
GCSScrollbarexGetPageSize.................................. 356 GCSSetEndPoint......................................................256
GCSScrollbarexGetPinchColor................................ 367 GCSSetExitStatus ....................................................213
GCSScrollbarexGetPinchWidth ............................... 366 GCSSetFocus ..........................................................164
GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOffImgID ...................... 361 GCSSetFocusInformation ........................................166
GCSScrollbarexGetPrevBtnOnImgID ...................... 360 GCSSetFocusStatus ................................................146
GCSScrollbarexGetRange....................................... 357 GCSSetGBaseObject...............................................182
GCSScrollbarexGetScrollArrowColor ...................... 358 GCSSetHWDCEnvironment .....................................181
GCSScrollbarexGetScrollPosition ........................... 359 GCSSetMemorySpace .............................................168
GCSScrollbarexSetBackGroundColor ..................... 363 GCSSetModalStatus ................................................184
GCSScrollbarexSetBarEnableStatus....................... 367 GCSSetModuleID.....................................................227
GCSScrollbarexSetDirection ................................... 354 GCSSetNextBlinkControl .........................................177
GCSScrollbarexSetDisplay...................................... 352 GCSSetNextScrollControl ........................................179
GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOffImgID....................... 362 GCSSetNextTimerObject .........................................174
GCSScrollbarexSetNextBtnOnImgID....................... 361 GCSSetPageOffset ..................................................229
GCSScrollbarexSetOutLineBorderID....................... 364 GCSSetPaletteColors...............................................217
GCSScrollbarexSetPageSize .................................. 355 GCSSetPaletteStatus...............................................215
GCSScrollbarexSetPinchColor ................................ 366 GCSSetPanelPlane..................................................211
GCSScrollbarexSetPinchWidth ............................... 365 GCSSetPanelStatus.................................................147
GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOffImgID....................... 360 GCSSetParent..........................................................149
GCSScrollbarexSetPrevBtnOnImgID....................... 359 GCSSetPenColor .....................................................250
GCSScrollbarexSetRange ....................................... 356 GCSSetPenDash .....................................................251
GCSScrollbarexSetScrollArrowColor....................... 357 GCSSetPenSize.......................................................252
GCSScrollbarexSetScrollPosition ............................ 358 GCSSetPoly .............................................................257
GCSSetActiveChild.................................................. 194 GCSSetPosition .......................................................137
GCSSetAngle .......................................................... 253 GCSSetPrevBlinkControl .........................................176
GCSSetBackGroundDesign .................................... 190 GCSSetPrevScrollControl ........................................178
GCSSetBlinkEnableStatus ...................................... 236 GCSSetPrevTimerObject .........................................173
GCSSetBlinkOffInterval ........................................... 196 GCSSetRedrawStatus..............................................170
GCSSetBlinkOnInterval ........................................... 197 GCSSetScreenManager...........................................226
GCSSetBlinkStatus.................................................. 175 GCSSetStartPoint ....................................................255
GCSSetBlinkType.................................................... 235 GCSSetStyleStatus ..................................................148
GCSSetBounds ....................................................... 139 GCSSetSystemActiveColor ......................................205
GCSSetBrush .......................................................... 254 GCSSetSystemBackColor........................................204
GCSSetCaptionScrollDelayTime ............................. 243 GCSSetSystemBorderID ..........................................202
GCSSetCaptionScrollEnable ................................... 238 GCSSetSystemFontID .............................................201
GCSSetCaptionScrollMovementValue .................... 245 GCSSetSystemForeColor ........................................203
GCSSetCaptionScrollPosition ................................. 247 GCSSetSystemInactiveColor ...................................206
GCSSetCaptionScrollRefreshTime.......................... 244 GCSSetSystemPalette .............................................225
GCSSetCaptionScrollStartPosition .......................... 246 GCSSetSystemPaletteID .........................................216
GCSSetCaptionScrollStatus .................................... 241 GCSSetSystemStatus ..............................................214
GCSSetCaptionStatus ............................................. 145 GCSSetTitleBarStatus..............................................186

X-7
 Index

GCSSetVisibleStatus............................................... 142 GCSTextboxSetMaxGValue.....................................386

GCSSetWindowPlane.............................................. 212 GCSTextboxSetMinGValue......................................387
GCSShowPanel....................................................... 220 GCSTextboxSetNormalColor ...................................373
GCSStartCaptionBlink ............................................. 237 GCSTextboxSetPasswordStatus..............................377
GCSStartCaptionScroll ............................................ 239 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus......381
GCSStopCaptionBlink ............................................. 238 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus ...........383
GCSStopCaptionScroll ............................................ 240 GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputNumberStatus .............379
GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus ........380
GCSTextboxSetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus .....382
GCST GCSTextboxSetString ..............................................388
GCSTextboxSetStringBuffer.....................................392
GCSTextboxGetBackGroundPattern ....................... 393 GCSTextboxSetTextType ........................................375
GCSTextboxGetBorderID ........................................ 369 GCSTimer ................................................................165
GCSTextboxGetCaption .......................................... 371
GCSTextboxGetCheckMaxStatus ........................... 385
GCSTextboxGetCheckMinStatus ............................ 386 GCSU
GCSTextboxGetCommaStatus................................ 379
GCSTextboxGetDisableColor .................................. 375 GCSUpdateScroll .....................................................248
GCSTextboxGetFocusColor .................................... 373 GCSUser ..................................................................165
GCSTextboxGetFocusEffect ................................... 372
GCSTextboxGetFontID............................................ 370
GCSTextboxGetFormatID ....................................... 377 GCSW
GCSTextboxGetGValue .......................................... 391
GCSTextboxGetMaxGValue.................................... 387 GCSWDCBeginDraw ...............................................405

GCSTextboxGetMinGValue..................................... 388 GCSWDCDelete.......................................................407

GCSTextboxGetNormalColor .................................. 374 GCSWDCEndDraw ..................................................406

GCSTextboxGetPasswordStatus ............................ 378 GCSWDCGetClipRect..............................................404

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputCapitalLetterStatus..... 382 GCSWDCGetHGDRAW ...........................................403

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputFullLetterStatus .......... 384 GCSWDCInceptClipRect..........................................405

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputNumberStatus ............ 380 GCSWDCNew..........................................................406

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSmallLetterStatus....... 381 GCSWDCOffsetOrigin ..............................................403

GCSTextboxGetRefuseInputSymbolLetterStatus .... 383 GCSWDCSetClipRect ..............................................404

GCSTextboxGetString ............................................. 389 GCSWDCSetOrigin ..................................................407

GCSTextboxGetStringBuffer ................................... 392

GCSTextboxGetTextType ....................................... 376
GCSTextboxSetBackGroundPattern ....................... 393 GD
GCSTextboxSetBorderID ........................................ 368
GCSTextboxSetCaption .......................................... 370 GDB
GCSTextboxSetCheckMaxStatus............................ 384
GCSTextboxSetCheckMinStatus............................. 385 GDBeginDraw ..............................................................8

GCSTextboxSetCommaStatus ................................ 378 GDBitBlt .......................................................................9

GCSTextboxSetDisableColor .................................. 374

GCSTextboxSetFocusColor .................................... 372
GDC
GCSTextboxSetFocusEffect.................................... 371
GCSTextboxSetFontID ............................................ 369
GDCalcBorderRect.....................................................10
GCSTextboxSetFormatID........................................ 376
GDCloseDrawHandle .................................................10
GCSTextboxSetGValue........................................... 390

X-8
 Index

GDCreateVram .......................................................... 88 GDGetPalette .............................................................33

GDGetPixel ................................................................34
GDGetPrevChar .........................................................35
GDD GDGetStringLength....................................................35
GDGetStringWidth......................................................36
GDDefineFillPattern................................................... 11 GDGetVram................................................................91
GDDefinePenDash .................................................... 12
GDDeleteVram .......................................................... 88
GDDrawArc ............................................................... 13 GDI
GDDrawBezier........................................................... 14
GDDrawCaptionCursorString .................................... 15 GDInceptClipRect.......................................................37
GDDrawCaptionString ............................................... 16 GDInitPlatform............................................................37
GDDrawCaptionStringResource................................ 17
GDDrawGrf................................................................ 18
GDDrawImage ........................................................... 19 GDL
GDDrawImageResource............................................ 20
GDDrawOval ............................................................. 21 GDLineTo ...................................................................38

GDDrawOvalBorder................................................... 22
GDDrawOvalBorderResource ................................... 23
GDDrawPie................................................................ 24
GDM
GDDrawPoly.............................................................. 25
GDMoveTo .................................................................38
GDDrawRect ............................................................. 25
GDDrawRectBorder................................................... 26
GDDrawRectBorderResource ................................... 27
GDO
GDDrawRRect ........................................................... 28
GDDrawString ........................................................... 29 GDOffsetLocalOrigin ..................................................39
GDDrawStringResource ............................................ 29 GDOpenDrawHandle .................................................39

GDE GDQ

GDEndDraw .............................................................. 30 GDQueryError ............................................................40

GDQuitPlatform ..........................................................40

GDF
GDR
GDFlushScreen ......................................................... 30
GDFlushScreenForce ................................................ 89 GDRemoveDrawableRegion ......................................91

GDG GDS

GDGetCharHeight ..................................................... 31 GDSetBackColor ........................................................41

GDGetCharWidth ...................................................... 31 GDSetBrush ...............................................................41
GDGetGradationInfo.................................................. 90 GDSetClipRect ...........................................................42
GDGetLocalOrigin ..................................................... 90 GDSetDisplay.............................................................42
GDGetNextChar ........................................................ 32 GDSetDrawableRegion ..............................................92

X-9
 Index

GDSetDrawingMode.................................................. 43
GDSetFillAttribute ...................................................... 44 GEQ
GDSetFillColor........................................................... 45
GDSetFillPattern........................................................ 46 GEQuitEvent ............................................................106

GDSetFont................................................................. 47
GDSetForeColor ........................................................ 47
GDSetGradationInfo .................................................. 92
GES
GDSetLocalMode ...................................................... 48
GESetEvent..............................................................108
GDSetLocalOrigin...................................................... 93
GESetSystemTime...................................................111
GDSetPenColor ......................................................... 48
GESetTimer..............................................................110
GDSetPenDash ......................................................... 49
GDSetPenJoin ........................................................... 50
GDSetPenSize .......................................................... 51
GDSetPixel ................................................................ 51 GF
GDSetSimpleFont...................................................... 52
GFG
GDSetSimpleFontResource ...................................... 52
GDSetVirtualMode..................................................... 53
GFGetFontAttribute ....................................................54
GDSetVirtualRect ...................................................... 53
GFGetFontCount........................................................55
GDSetVram ............................................................... 54
GFGetFontInformation ...............................................55
GFGetFontUserAttribute ............................................56
GFGetSize..................................................................56
GE

GEC GFL

GECheckTimer ........................................................ 111 GFLoadFont ...............................................................57

GEClearTargetEvent ............................................... 113
GEClearTimerEvent................................................. 109
GECompareSystemTime......................................... 112 GFR
GECreateEventMessage ......................................... 107
GFReleaseFont ..........................................................57

GEG
GFS
GEGetEvent ............................................................ 109
GEGetSystemTime.................................................. 112 GFSetFontAttribute ....................................................58
GFSetFontUserAttribute .............................................58
GFSetSize ..................................................................59
GEI

GEInitEvent ............................................................. 106

GI

GIO
GEK

GIOClose..................................................................493
GEKillTimer ............................................................. 110
GIOOpen ..................................................................493
GIORead ..................................................................494

X - 10
 Index

GIOSeek.................................................................. 496 GMG

GIOWrite.................................................................. 495
GMGMemCreate ......................................................498
GMGMemDelete ......................................................499
GMGMemGetChar ...................................................500
GL
GMGMemGetDouble................................................502
GMGMemGetLong ...................................................501
GLD
GMGMemGetShort ..................................................499
GLDuplicateLine ........................................................ 70 GMGMemGetString..................................................503
GMGMemSelect.......................................................498
GMGMemSetChar....................................................501
GLG GMGMemSetDouble ................................................503
GMGMemSetLong ...................................................502
GLGetLine ................................................................. 71 GMGMemSetShort...................................................500
GMGMemSetString ..................................................504

GLM
GMM
GLMapLine ................................................................ 72
GMMemoryAlloc.........................................................86
GMMemoryFree .........................................................87
GLO

GLOffsetLine ............................................................. 73 GMS

GMSetMemorySpace .................................................84
GLP

GLPhysicalToVirtualLine ........................................... 73
GP

GPG
GLS
GPGetPoly .................................................................80
GLSetLine.................................................................. 74

GPM
GLV
GPMapPoly ................................................................81
GLVirtualToPhysicalLine ........................................... 75

GPO
GM
GPOffsetPoly..............................................................82
GMD

GMDeleteMemorySpace ........................................... 85 GPP

GPPhysicalToVirtualPoly ...........................................82

X - 11
 Index

GRCSetLocale ...........................................................98
GRCSetResourceHandle .........................................102
GPS GRCUnicodeToMultiByte .........................................103

GPSetPoly ................................................................. 83
GRD

GPT GRDuplicateRect........................................................59

GPTDuplicatePoint .................................................... 75
GPTGetPoint ............................................................. 76 GRE
GPTMapPoint ............................................................ 76
GPTMapToScreenPoint............................................. 77 GREqualRect .............................................................60
GPTMapToVirtualPoint.............................................. 77
GPTOffsetPoint ......................................................... 78
GPTPhysicalToVirtualPoint ....................................... 78 GRG
GPTSetPoint.............................................................. 79
GPTVirtualToPhysicalPoint ....................................... 79 GRGetRect.................................................................61

GRI
GPV
GRInceptRect.............................................................62

GPVirtualToPhysicalPoly........................................... 83

GRM

GRMapRect................................................................63
GRMapToScreenRect ................................................63
GR GRMapToVirtualRect .................................................64

GRC
GRO
GRCGetLocale .......................................................... 99
GRCGetResourceHandle ........................................ 102
GROffsetRect .............................................................64
GRCLoadBorder ........................................................ 95
GRCLoadFillPattern................................................... 99
GRCLoadFont ........................................................... 95 GRP
GRCLoadHtmlFileName .......................................... 100
GRCLoadImage......................................................... 96 GRPhysicalToVirtualRect ...........................................65
GRCLoadLanguageStr ............................................ 100 GRPointInRect ...........................................................65
GRCLoadLinePattern .............................................. 101
GRCLoadLocaleFont ................................................. 97
GRCLoadLocaleString............................................... 97 GRR
GRCLoadNowLanguageStr ..................................... 101
GRCLoadPalette ....................................................... 98 GRResizeRect............................................................66
GRCLoadString ......................................................... 96
GRCMultiByteToUnicode......................................... 104
GRS

X - 12
 Index

GRSetRect ................................................................ 67
GRShiftRect............................................................... 68

GRU

GRUnionRect ............................................................ 69

GRV

GRVirtualToPhysicalRect .......................................... 69

X - 13
 Revision History

Date of revision Manual No. Revision details

Nov. 2004 IB(NA)1500109-A First edition created.

Nov. 2004 IB(NA)1500109-B The following functions were added to section 5.

4 functions about GCSScrollbar, such as GCSScrollbarexSetRange.
16 functions about GCSPicture, such as GCSPictureSetDisplay.

Mistakes were corrected.

Feb. 2007 IB(NA)1500109-C GCS functions were added.

Mistakes were corrected.
 Global service network
NORTH AMERICA FA Center CHINA FA Center
EUROPEAN FA Center KOREAN FA Center

ASEAN FA Center

HONG KONG FA Center

TAIWAN FA Center

North America FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION INC.) ASEAN FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC ASIA PTE. LTD.)
Illinois CNC Service Center Singapore CNC Service Center
500 CORPORATE WOODS PARKWAY, VERNON HILLS, IL. 60061, U.S.A. 307 ALEXANDRA ROAD #05-01/02 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC BUILDING SINGAPORE 159943
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 (Se FAX: +1-847-478-2650 (Se TEL: +65-6473-2308 FAX: +65-6476-7439
California CNC Service Center Thailand MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (F. A. TECH CO., LTD)
5665 PLAZA DRIVE, CYPRESS, CA. 90630, U.S.A. 898/19,20,21,22 S.V. CITY BUILDING OFFICE TOWER 1 FLOOR 12,14 RAMA III RD BANGPONGPANG,
TEL: +1-714-220-4796 FAX: +1-714-229-3818 YANNAWA, BANGKOK 10120. THAILAND
Georgia CNC Service Center TEL: +66-2-682-6522 FAX: +66-2-682-6020
2810 PREMIERE PARKWAY SUITE 400, DULUTH, GA., 30097, U.S.A. Malaysia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
TEL: +1-678-258-4500 FAX: +1-678-258-4519 (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
New Jersey CNC Service Center 60, JALAN USJ 10/1B 47620 UEP SUBANG JAYA SELANGOR DARUL EHSAN MALAYSIA
200 COTTONTAIL LANE SOMERSET, NJ. 08873, U.S.A. TEL: +60-3-5631-7605 FAX: +60-3-5631-7636
TEL: +1-732-560-4500 FAX: +1-732-560-4531 JOHOR MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
Michigan CNC Service Satellite (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM SDN. BHD.)
2545 38TH STREET, ALLEGAN, MI., 49010, U.S.A. NO. 16, JALAN SHAHBANDAR 1, TAMAN UNGKU TUN AMINAH, 81300 SKUDAI, JOHOR MALAYSIA
TEL: +1-847-478-2500 FAX: +1-269-673-4092 TEL: +60-7-557-8218 FAX: +60-7-557-3404
Ohio CNC Service Satellite Indonesia MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
62 W. 500 S., ANDERSON, IN., 46013, U.S.A. (PT. AUTOTEKNINDO SUMBER MAKMUR)
TEL: +1-847-478-2608 FAX: +1-847-478-2690 WISMA NUSANTARA 14TH FLOOR JL. M.H. THAMRIN 59, JAKARTA 10350 INDONESIA
Texas CNC Service Satellite TEL: +62-21-3917-144 FAX: +62-21-3917-164
1000, NOLEN DRIVE SUITE 200, GRAPEVINE, TX. 76051, U.S.A. India MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
TEL: +1-817-251-7468 FAX: +1-817-416-1439 B-36FF, PAVANA INDUSTRIAL PREMISES M.I.D.C., BHOASRI PUNE 411026, INDIA
Canada CNC Service Center TEL: +91-20-2711-9484 FAX: +91-20-2712-8115
4299 14TH AVENUE MARKHAM, ON. L3R OJ2, CANADA BANGALORE MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite
TEL: +1-905-475-7728 FAX: +1-905-475-7935 (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Mexico CNC Service Center S 615, 6TH FLOOR, MANIPAL CENTER, BANGALORE 560001, INDIA
MARIANO ESCOBEDO 69 TLALNEPANTLA, 54030 EDO. DE MEXICO TEL: +91-80-509-2119 FAX: +91-80-532-0480
TEL: +52-55-9171-7662 FAX: +52-55-9171-7698 Delhi MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Parts Center (MESSUNG SALES & SERVICES PVT. LTD.)
Monterrey CNC Service Satellite 1197, SECTOR 15 PART-2, OFF DELHI-JAIPUR HIGHWAY BEHIND 32ND MILESTONE GURGAON
ARGENTINA 3900, FRACC. LAS TORRES, MONTERREY, N.L., 64720, MEXICO 122001, INDIA
TEL: +52-81-8365-4171 FAX: +52-81-8365-4171 TEL: +91-98-1024-8895 FAX:
Brazil MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center Philippines MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
(AUTOMOTION IND. COM. IMP. E EXP. LTDA.) (FLEXIBLE AUTOMATION SYSTEM CORPORATION)
ACESSO JOSE SARTORELLI, KM 2.1 18550-000 BOITUVA – SP, BRAZIL UNIT No.411, ALABAMG CORPORATE CENTER KM 25. WEST SERVICE ROAD SOUTH SUPERHIGHWAY,
TEL: +55-15-3363-9900 FAX: +55-15-3363-9911 ALABAMG MUNTINLUPA METRO MANILA, PHILIPPINES 1771
TEL: +63-2-807-2416 FAX: +63-2-807-2417
European FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC EUROPE B.V.) Vietnam MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (SA GIANG TECHNO CO., LTD)
Germany CNC Service Center 47-49 HOANG SA ST. DAKAO WARD, DIST.1 HO CHI MINH CITY, VIETNAM
GOTHAER STRASSE 8, 40880 RATINGEN, GERMANY TEL: +84-8-910-4763 FAX: +84-8-910-2593
TEL: +49-2102-486-0 FAX:+49-2102486-591
South Germany CNC Service Center China FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION (SHANGHAI) LTD.)
KURZE STRASSE. 40, 70794 FILDERSTADT-BONLANDEN, GERMANY China CNC Service Center
TEL: +49-711-3270-010 FAX: +49-711-3270-0141 2/F., BLOCK 5 BLDG.AUTOMATION INSTRUMENTATION PLAZA, 103 CAOBAO RD. SHANGHAI 200233,
France CNC Service Center CHINA
25, BOULEVARD DES BOUVETS, 92741 NANTERRE CEDEX FRANCE TEL: +86-21-6120-0808 FAX: +86-21-6494-0178
TEL: +33-1-41-02-83-13 FAX: +33-1-49-01-07-25 Shenyang CNC Service Center
Lyon CNC Service Satellite TEL: +86-24-2397-0184 FAX: +86-24-2397-0185
Beijing CNC Service Satellite
U.K CNC Service Center 9/F, OFFICE TOWER1, HENDERSON CENTER, 18 JIANGUOMENNEI DAJIE, DONGCHENG DISTRICT,
TRAVELLERS LANE, HATFIELD, HERTFORDSHIRE, AL10 8XB, U.K. BEIJING 100005, CHINA
TEL: +44-1707-282-846 FAX:-44-1707-278-992 TEL: +86-10-6518-8830 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
Italy CNC Service Center China MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
ZONA INDUSTRIALE VIA ARCHIMEDE 35 20041 AGRATE BRIANZA, MILANO ITALY (BEIJING JIAYOU HIGHTECH TECHNOLOGY DEVELOPMENT CO.)
TEL: +39-039-60531-342 FAX: +39-039-6053-206 RM 709, HIGH TECHNOLOGY BUILDING NO.229 NORTH SI HUAN ZHONG ROAD, HAIDIAN DISTRICT ,
Spain CNC Service Satellite BEIJING 100083, CHINA
CTRA. DE RUBI, 76-80 -APDO.420 08190 SAINT CUGAT DEL VALLES, BARCELONA SPAIN TEL: +86-10-8288-3030 FAX: +86-10-6518-8030
TEL: +34-935-65-2236 FAX: Tianjin CNC Service Satellite
Turkey MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center RM909, TAIHONG TOWER, NO220 SHIZILIN STREET, HEBEI DISTRICT, TIANJIN, CHINA 300143
(GENEL TEKNIK SISTEMLER LTD. STI.) TEL: -86-22-2653-9090 FAX: +86-22-2635-9050
DARULACEZE CAD. FAMAS IS MERKEZI A BLOCK NO.43 KAT2 80270 OKMEYDANI ISTANBUL, Shenzhen CNC Service Satellite
TURKEY RM02, UNIT A, 13/F, TIANAN NATIONAL TOWER, RENMING SOUTH ROAD, SHENZHEN, CHINA 518005
TEL: +90-212-320-1640 FAX: +90-212-320-1649 TEL: +86-755-2515-6691 FAX: +86-755-8218-4776
Poland MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o) Changchun Service Satellite
UL SLICZNA 34, 31-444 KRAKOW, POLAND TEL: +86-431-50214546 FAX: +86-431-5021690
TEL: +48-12-632-28-85 FAX: Hong Kong CNC Service Center
Wroclaw MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Satellite (MPL Technology Sp. z. o. o) UNIT A, 25/F RYODEN INDUSTRIAL CENTRE, 26-38 TA CHUEN PING STREET, KWAI CHUNG, NEW
UL KOBIERZYCKA 23, 52-315 WROCLAW, POLAND TERRITORIES, HONG KONG
TEL: +48-71-333-77-53 FAX: +48-71-333-77-53 TEL: +852-2619-8588 FAX: +852-2784-1323
Czech MITSUBISHI CNC Agent Service Center
(AUTOCONT CONTROL SYSTEM S.R.O. ) Taiwan FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC TAIWAN CO., LTD.)
NEMOCNICNI 12, 702 00 OSTRAVA 2 CZECH REPUBLIC Taichung CNC Service Center
TEL: +420-596-152-426 FAX: +420-596-152-112 NO.8-1, GONG YEH 16TH RD., TAICHUNG INDUSTIAL PARK TAICHUNG CITY, TAIWAN R.O.C.
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Taipei CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689
Tainan CNC Service Satellite
TEL: +886-4-2359-0688 FAX: +886-4-2359-0689

Korean FA Center (MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC AUTOMATION KOREA CO., LTD.)

Korea CNC Service Center
1480-6, GAYANG-DONG, GANGSEO-GU SEOUL 157-200, KOREA
TEL: +82-2-3660-9631 FAX: +82-2-3664-8668
Notice
Every effort has been made to keep up with software and hardware revisions in the
contents described in this manual. However, please understand that in some
unavoidable cases simultaneous revision is not possible.
Please contact your Mitsubishi Electric dealer with any questions or comments
regarding the use of this product.

Duplication Prohibited
This manual may not be reproduced in any form, in part or in whole, without written
permission from Mitsubishi Electric Corporation.
© 2004-2007 MITSUBISHI ELECTRIC CORPORATION
ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.